Panasonic Digital Camera AJ HDC27FE User Manual

Camera/VTR  
AJ-  
E
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attention/Attentie  
Batteries are used for the main power source and memory back-up in the product.  
At the end of their useful life, you should not throw them away.  
Instead, hand them in as small chemical waste.  
Voor de primaire voeding en het reservegeheugen van het apparaat wordt gebruikgemaakt van  
een batterij.  
O
O
Wanneer de batterij is uitgeput, mag u deze niet gewoon weggooien, maar dient u deze als klein  
chemisch afval weg te doen.  
To remove the battery/Verwijderen van de batterij  
Main Power Battery (Ni-Cd Battery)  
Batterij Voor Primaire Voeding (Nikkelcadmiumbatterij)  
Anton/Bauer Battery  
Anton/Bauer-Batterij  
Battery/Batterij AU-BP402  
Battery/Batterij  
AU-BP402  
Unlocking lever  
Ontgrendelingshefboom  
If a battery made by any other manufacturer is to be used, check the Operating Instructions accompanying the battery.  
In geval u een batterij van een anden fabrikant zou gebruiken, gelieve dan eerst zorgvuldig de gebruiksaanwijzing van  
deze batterij te lezen.  
O
O
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)  
Batterij Voor Reservegeheugen (Lithiumbatterij)  
For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end  
of its service life, please consult your dealer.  
Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de  
batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat bij einde  
levensduur afdankt.  
O
O
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)  
Batterij Voor Reservegeheugen  
(Lithiumbatterij)  
3 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Remaining battery charge and audio channel level  
and remaining tape displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Displays relating to errors and warnings . . . . . . .51  
Displays relating to time codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Features of the camera unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Features of the VTR unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Adjusting the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Adjustments and setup using the setting  
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Parts and their functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Power supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Accessory mounting section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Audio function section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Viewfinder section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Shooting (recording)/playback function section . .15  
Warning/status display section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Menu operation section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Time code related section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Adjusting the white balance and black  
balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Adjusting the white balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Adjusting the black balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Setting the electronic shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Shutter modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Registering the shutter speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Setting the shutter mode and speed . . . . . . . . . .59  
Changing the shutter speed and mode selection  
range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Setting the synchro scan mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Switching the shutter speed display . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Using the Anton/Bauer battery pack . . . . . . . . . .23  
Using the BP-90 type battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Using the Sony NP-1/BP-90 battery pack . . . . . .25  
Using the V-mount type battery pack . . . . . . . . . .25  
Using an AC power supply  
Film tone gamma function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Switching the frame frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
when the AJ-B75 AC adapter is used . . . . . . . . .26  
Attaching the lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Adjusting the lens flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Adjusting the white shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Variable frame rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Setting the frame rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Scan reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Setting the scan reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Adjusting the viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Attaching the viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Detaching the viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Adjusting the viewfinder position . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Adjusting the audio level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Manual audio level adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Setting the time data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Setting the user’s bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Setting the time code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Externally locking the time code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Audio input preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
When attaching a microphone to the viewfinder  
(optional accessory) for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
When attaching a microphone to the main unit for  
use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
When connecting a microphone to the  
MIC IN jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
When connecting a microphone to the  
AUDIO IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
When using a wireless microphone . . . . . . . . . . .38  
When connecting audio components . . . . . . . . . .38  
Tape management information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
How to use the user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
How to use the scene file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Setup card operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Formatting the setup card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Saving the data settings on the card . . . . . . . . . .76  
Loading the data saved on the card . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Mounting the unit on a tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Attaching the shoulder strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Adjusting the shoulder pad position . . . . . . . . . .40  
Attaching the rain cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Connecting the extension control unit . . . . . . . .41  
Viewfinder lamp displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Cassette tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
Scene-to-scene continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Playback  
(checking what has been recorded) . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Rec review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Colour playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Setting the  
lamp displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Viewfinder screen status displays . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Selecting the display items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Display modes and setting change messages . . .48  
Switching the display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Setting the marker displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Setting the camera ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Lens RET button functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Other VTR functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
NEWS REC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
RETAKE function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
INTERVAL REC (intermittent recording)  
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
4 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Menu operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Basic setting menu operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Displaying sub-menus and deciding on  
<VTR MENUS>  
VTR MAIN MENU screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
FUNCTION screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
BATTERY/TAPE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115  
BATTERY SETTING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
VTR VF INDICATOR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
MIC/AUDIO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
TC/UB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119  
TIME DATE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121  
VTR USER MENU SELECT screen . . . . . . . . . .121  
VTR CARD READ/WRITE screen . . . . . . . . . . .121  
VTR INITIALIZE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121  
DIAGNOSTIC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121  
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Setting menu configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Setting menu screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
<FILM (CAM) MENUS>  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1 screen . . . . . . . . . . .93  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 screen . . . . . . . . . . .93  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3 screen . . . . . . . . . . .93  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 screen . . . . . . . . . . .93  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1  
ROP screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
MATRIX screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
COLOR CORRECTION 1 screen . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
COLOR CORRECTION 2 screen . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
LOW SETTING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
MID SETTING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
HIGH SETTING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
ADDITIONAL DTL1 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
ADDITIONAL DTL2 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
SKIN TONE DTL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
KNEE/LEVEL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
GAMMA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
CAMERA SETTING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
<VTR USER MENU SELECT>  
FUNCTION screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122  
BATTERY/TAPE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122  
VTR VF INDICATOR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
MIC/AUDIO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
TC/UB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
Warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
Emergency eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
Head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
Cleaning inside the viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
Phenomena inherent to CCD cameras . . . . . . .127  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
VF DISPLAY screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
VF MARKER screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
VF INDICATOR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
CAMERA ID screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
SHUTTER SPEED screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
SHUTTER SELECT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
!LED screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
CAMERA SW MODE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
SUPER GAIN screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
FRAME MODE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Replacing the backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
Inspections prior to shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
Preparation for inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
Inspecting the camera unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
Inspecting the viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Inspecting the aperture and zoom functions . . .130  
Inspecting the VTR unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3  
CAM CARD READ/WRITE screen . . . . . . . . . . .107  
CAM CARD R/W SELECT screen . . . . . . . . . . .107  
GENLOCK/IRIS screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
LENS ADJ screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 1 screen . .109  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 2 screen . .109  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 3 screen . .109  
BLACK SHADING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
WHITE SHADING screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
FLARE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
COLORIMETRY screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
INITIALIZE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
DIAGNOSTIC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
EVALUATION screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
OPTION screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
5 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
The AJ-HDC27F is a camera/VTR that supports the  
SMPTE-296M 1280a720 scanning standard.  
Integrated in this single unit are an HD colour video  
camera featuring a 1-million pixel IT-CCD unit with on-  
chip lens as the pickup device, and a DVCPRO HD  
format VTR incorporating the latest compression  
technology.  
The camera unit supports a variable frame function  
and film tone gamma function, and it also supports the  
Ultra Prime lenses for 35 mm film cameras as a  
standard feature.  
Featuring a 100 Mbps recording rate for the VTR as  
well, this unit is capable of recording images with an  
extremely high picture quality to achieve the highest  
performance and most sophisticated functions as an  
integrated camera/VTR for electronic field production  
(EFP) applications.  
Furthermore, it is compact and lightweight, has low  
power consumption, and excels in achieving a high  
level of picture quality, sensitivity, and mobility, and is  
extremely dust-proof and moisture-proof. These are  
all attributes which enable the unit to be used for  
electronic news gathering (ENG) applications as well.  
Since digital signal processing is provided in both the  
camera unit and VTR unit, the picture quality is further  
improved while the unit’s stability is also enhanced.  
Small multimedia cards or SD memory cards meeting  
global standards can be used for the camera and VTR  
setting data as part of a system which can accomplish  
data management.  
Features  
Features of the camera unit  
The camera unit of the AJ-HDC27F has the  
following features.  
OHigh sensitivity: 2000 lux, F12  
OFrame rate: 4 fps (frame/sec.) to 60 fps  
OHigh signal-to-noise ratio: 54 dB (standard)  
OLow smear  
OLow flare  
OScan reverse  
OSwitchable frame frequency: 60.00 Hz or 59.94 Hz  
Film tone gamma function  
In the beginning, the first and foremost aspect defining  
the manifold powers of expression that only the  
medium of film could achieve was the extent of a  
film’s latitude (reproduction range). What Panasonic  
did was to use its resources to develop an exclusive  
gamma curve for reproducing film tones by means of  
the CCDs, and this led to the capability of expressing  
natural gradations and reproducing a rich variety of  
colours—something that was beyond the means of  
Variable frame rate  
conventional video cameras.  
The AJ-HDC27F  
Frame-drop (under-cranking) shooting and high-speed  
(over-cranking) shooting, which are special film  
shooting techniques, have been achieved for the first  
time in a video camera.  
The variable frame rate function can be set as desired  
from 4 fps (frame/sec.) to 60 fps.  
The shutter speed can also be set from 0.8% of the  
frame rate (aperture angle: 3 degrees) to 97.2%  
(aperture angle: 350 degrees), enabling full use to be  
made of many different presentation techniques.  
Along with continually recording at 60 fps, the VTR  
unit enables specific effective frames alone to be  
marked with time codes so that off-line editing using a  
conventional DVCPRO HD VTR is possible. This  
makes it possible to construct a 24 fps production  
system with minimal equipment investment.  
incorporates a total of three gamma curves—two cine  
curves (for films/for videos) and the conventional  
video gamma curve—and it enables the curve that  
best suits the application at hand to be selected. The  
powers of expression achieved as a result are  
comparable to those provided by film. The high  
sensitivity that is simply superior to film cameras  
delivers an excellent balance between brightness and  
high picture quality: indeed, the kind of sensitivity that  
corresponds to ISO640 enables shooting with the  
same kind of feel as ultra-fine-grain films.  
When the conventional video gamma curve is to be  
used, set the unit to the video mode using the CAM  
MENU SEL item on the OPTION screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
When one of the cine curves is to be used, set the unit  
to the film mode using the CAM MENU SEL item on  
the OPTION screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4,  
and then select the desired curve by setting the CINE  
GAMMA SEL item on the GAMMA screen of FILM  
MAIN MENU 1.  
6 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Features of the camera unit  
Prime lens mode  
Camera unit equipped to capture a wide range of  
image creation activities from cinema production  
to broadcasting applications  
Not only the lens that does justice to the sensitivity  
equivalent to a film but also the various devices and  
equipment that are peripheral to the camera combine to  
play roles which are so critical that they cannot be  
divorced from the technical skills of the person operating  
the camera. Using an HD lens adapter made by  
Angenieux, this unit supports the ultra-prime lenses used  
for film cameras as a standard feature. What’s more,  
Panasonic has achieved an industry first by incorporating  
as a standard feature, a scan reverse function, which  
cancels out image reversal occurring when the adapter is  
used, and switching can be easily accomplished by a  
menu setting.  
The unit also supports slide bases, matte boxes and  
other film camera equipment which users may have been  
using for years.  
A full range of long viewfinders, small LCD monitors and  
other options available from related manufacturers is  
available, and the maximum can be derived from formats  
ranging from films to HD with the same ease afforded by  
simply changing the main camera unit.  
OA sensitivity of F12 (2000 lux) achieved by the three  
highly sensitive CCDs.  
The minimum subject brightness is 0.7 lux.  
OGamma curves (switchable) for reproducing film  
tones.  
ONot only a natural choice like 24 fps (frame/sec.) for  
films but also any number of shooting frames from  
4 fps to 60 fps can be set.  
ODigital setup for controlling image production using  
numerical values and for simple operation using the  
jog dial and gradation menu.  
OCinema image menu provided for film producers.  
OSetup data in up to 8 files can be stored on an SD  
card (optional accessory: RP-SD008B).  
OBuilt-in high picture quality circuits including auto  
knee, many different detail functions, shading  
compensation, 12-axis colour compensation circuit  
and masking circuit.  
OBuilt-in 2-level zebra pattern and spot zebra  
functions.  
O3 values among the 10 possible settings from –6 dB  
(–3 dB in film mode) to +30 dB allocated to the gain  
selector; also, the gain can be increased up to +36  
dB by the super gain function.  
OThe following functions can be allocated to the  
USER1 and USER2 buttons: super iris, super gain,  
super black, black stretch, audio CH1/CH2 input  
front/rear switching, recording start/stop, return  
switch, and Y GET (output luminance level  
measurement).  
Film user menu  
Panasonic does its best to cater to film camera users not  
only on the functions and performance front but also in  
terms of operation.  
For instance, it has provided a cinema image menu  
(FILM USER MENU) which brings together on one page  
the setting items that are frequently used in location  
cinema shooting.  
Along with the gamma curve selection and scan reverse  
ON/OFF functions, the settings for the hard and soft  
texture adjustments, gradation settings for the shadow  
areas, latitude adjustments, and tungsten lighting  
(3200K) type or daylight (5600K) type can be selected  
just like with films on one menu screen.  
OAn electronic shutter with a variable function  
0.8% to 97.2% of the frame rate (aperture angle of 3.0 to  
350.0 degrees)  
over and above the 6 shutter speeds.  
Digital signal processing  
1/100 , 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 and 1/2000 sec.  
(or 180.0, 172.8, 144.0, 120.0, 90.0 and 45.0 deg)  
Analogue signals are converted into digital signals  
through 10-bit A/D conversion at a sampling frequency of  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)/74.25 MHz (60.0Hz).  
This processing not only enhances the picture quality,  
stability and reliability but it also enables the viewfinder  
screen displays and many of the adjustment and setup  
items to be configured in a menu-driven format.  
OTungsten lighting (3200K) type or daylight (5600K)  
type can be selected just like with films on one  
menu screen. Two sets of ND&CC optical filters  
are featured as a standard option.  
OABB (automatic black balance) and AWB  
(automatic white balance) functions incorporated.  
Two values for each of the four CC filters can be  
retained as the AWB values.  
4-piece filter disc sets available as standard  
accessories  
The filter best suited to the subject’s brightness and  
colour temperature can be selected. Two independent  
sets of filter discs, one for CC and one for ND, each with  
four filter discs, are provided as standard accessories.  
OStatuses and warnings are displayed on the  
viewfinder screen.  
7 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Features of the VTR unit  
Digital system  
Built-in DOLBY NR system  
The pictures are compressed by a component digital  
recording system that uses the latest compression  
technology while non-compression PCM recording  
featuring excellent signal-to-noise ratio, frequency  
band, waveform characteristics and reproduction of  
detailed areas is employed for the sound. The result  
is an even higher picture and sound quality.  
The cue audio recording circuitry contains a Dolby B  
noise reduction circuit.  
Audio functions  
OA phantom power supply type of microphone  
(optional accessory) with sharp directivity  
characteristics can be attached. It can also be  
detached from the unit for use as an interview  
microphone.  
OOther kinds of microphones can also be connected  
and, using the model AJ-MH700P microphone  
holder (optional accessory), attached to the unit.  
Power saving management (SAVE REC) function  
When this unit is used for recording, its playback  
system circuitry is shut down. The output of signals to  
the HD SDI OUT connector is also shut down when  
the cable has not been connected so that the unit’s  
power can be conserved while the unit is being  
operated.  
NEWS REC function  
This function especially supports shooting in the  
context of news gathering or documentary filming to  
ensure that no opportune shutter opportunities are  
passed up.  
In other words, by controlling the start key  
acknowledgment time, the unit can continuously  
record without the user having to interrupt the  
recording: this safeguards against the failure to record  
those precious moments—a failure that occurs when  
recording is resumed after it has been shut down  
temporarily.  
Scene-to-scene continuity  
Simply by pressing the VTR START button or lens  
VTR button, continuity between the scenes is  
obtained at a precision of 0 to +1 frame.  
Rec review function  
The last 2 to 10 seconds of a recording are  
automatically rewound and played back to enable the  
user to quickly check what has been recorded.  
Playback function  
RETAKE function  
This function enables the playback picture (in black  
and white) to be viewed on the viewfinder screen.  
Colour playback pictures can be output from the HD  
SDI OUT connector.  
This function is for not leaving behind superfluous cuts  
when a cut turns out to be no good during the  
shooting of news, reports or art programmes.  
Users should remember to handle this function very  
carefully.  
If there is enough leeway in the shooting time and a  
particular cut is clearly judged to be no good, the tape  
is rewound to the start of the cut concerned and the  
rec pause (rec standby) mode is established by  
operating the MODE CHECK button and lens RET  
button. Since recording is now commenced from that  
point on the tape, the no-good cut will be deleted. In  
order to prevent the cut prior to the no-good cut from  
being deleted, a part of the no-good cut equivalent to  
ten or so frames is left behind.  
Built-in time code generator/reader  
The same or separate time code information can be  
recorded on the dedicated sub-code track and video  
AUX area, and played back.  
External locking of time code  
The built-in time code generator can be locked to an  
external generator. A lithium battery is used as the  
backup power supply of the built-in time code  
generator to back up the memory data for about a  
year even when no power is supplied to the unit.  
Tape management information  
By cutting down on the time taken for copying onto the  
work tape, for instance, this function is very effective  
in achieving economical operation.  
As the tape management information, this unit  
automatically saves the frame rate information on the  
shooting speeds, the active frame information on the  
first frame where the frame image was switched, and  
the active frame count information in the user’s bit of  
the sub-code track area (which used to be the LTC  
area).  
INTERVAL REC function  
This function makes simple interval shooting possible.  
It proves to be very effective when shooting  
programmes with a nature theme or art programmes.  
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.  
“DOLBY” and the double-D symbol Î are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.  
O
O
8 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System configuration  
Wireless  
Microphone kit  
microphone  
AJ-MC700P  
receiver  
WX-RJ700  
Battery case  
AU-M402H  
BP-90 type  
battery  
2.0-inch viewfinder  
AJ-HVF27P  
Sony Battery  
BP-90  
NP-1  
Sony  
Battery case  
Microphone holder  
AJ-MH700P  
NP/BP  
adapter plate  
Anton/Bauer Battery  
Lens  
(Bayonet type)  
FUJINON/CANON  
V-mount  
adapter plate  
IDX Battery  
E-50, E-80  
Sony Battery  
BP-L60/L90  
Camera/VTR  
AJ-HDC27F  
Rain cover  
SHAN-RC700  
AC adapter  
AJ-B75  
Soft carrying case  
AJ-SC900  
Cassette tape  
Cleaning tape  
AJ-CL12LP  
AJ-HP23LP  
AJ-HP32LP  
AJ-HP46LP  
Tripod mount  
adapter  
SHAN-TM700  
Setup memory card  
Multi-media card:  
VW-MMC8  
SD (Secure Digital) memory card:  
RP-SD008B  
Extension control  
unit  
AJ-EC3  
9 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
Power supply section  
1
2
4
3
1Battery mount  
This is for attaching the Anton/Bauer battery pack.  
2DC IN (external power input) socket (XLR, 4P)  
When operating this unit using an AC power  
source, this socket is connected to the model AJ-  
B75 AC adapter (optional accessory).  
3BREAKER button  
To protect the equipment, the circuit breaker is  
tripped when an overcurrent flows inside the unit,  
and the power is automatically turned off. Push this  
button to the pushed-in position after performing  
internal inspections and adjustments. If there is no  
problem, the power will be turned back on.  
4POWER switch  
ON : Set here to turn on the power.  
OFF: Set here to turn off the power.  
10 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
Accessory mounting section  
1
2 :  
1
<
5
6
3
4
6
8
7
;
9
1Hooks for attaching shoulder strap  
9Shoulder pad  
Attach the ends of the accessory shoulder strap to  
these hooks.  
This pad can be adjusted to facilitate operation  
when the unit is operated on the user’s shoulder.  
The pad position can be moved forward or  
backward when the two securing screws are  
loosened.  
2Light shoe  
Use this to attach the video light, etc.  
3Lens mount (Bayonet type)  
:Mounting hook for tape measure  
The tape measure used to measure the subject  
distance is attached here.  
Use this to attach the lens.  
4Lever for securing lens  
<Note>  
Insert the lens into the lens mount 3, and turn the  
This hook is not to be used for the shoulder strap.  
lens mount ring using this lever to secure the lens.  
;Focus mark  
5Lens mount cap  
This indicates the focus position of the CCD unit.  
To remove the cap, push the lever for securing the  
lens 4 up.  
<Spacer to support extension unit  
Future plans call for this connector to be used to  
support some options.  
Keep the cap in place while the lens is not  
attached.  
6Lens cable/microphone cable clamp  
This clamp is for anchoring the lens cable or  
microphone cable.  
7Tripod mount  
Mount the tripod attachment (SHAN-TM700),  
available as an optional accessory, when the unit is  
to be anchored to the tripod.  
8LENS terminal (12-pin)  
The connecting cable of the lens is connected here.  
For details concerning the lenses that can be used,  
consult your dealer.  
11 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
Audio function section (1)  
2
3
4
6
7
5
1
1MIC IN (microphone input) jack (XLR, 3-pin)  
Connect the microphone (optional accessory) here.  
The power for the microphone is supplied from this  
jack.  
5AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio input channel 1 & 2)  
connectors (XLR, 3-pin)  
An audio component or microphones are connected  
here.  
2AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2  
recording level adjustment) controls  
6LINE/MIC/+48V (line input/mic input/mic input +  
48V) selector switch  
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch 3 is  
set to MAN, the recording level of audio channels 1  
and 2 can be adjusted using these controls.  
This is used to switch the audio input signals from  
the audio component which has been connected to  
the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors 5.  
LINE : The audio input signals from the audio  
component serving as the line input are  
selected.  
MIC : The audio input signals from the internal  
power supply type of microphone are  
selected. (The phantom mic power is not  
supplied from the unit.)  
3AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2  
automatic/manual level adjustment selector)  
switch  
This is used to select the method for adjusting the  
audio levels of audio channels 1 and 2.  
AUTO : Set here for automatic adjustment.  
MAN : Set here for manual adjustment.  
+48V : The audio input signals from the external  
power supply type of microphone are  
selected. (The phantom mic power is  
supplied from the unit.)  
4AUDIO IN (audio input selector) switch  
This is used to select the input signals to be  
recorded on audio channels 1 and 2.  
FRONT : The input signals supplied from the  
microphone which has been connected to  
the MIC IN jack 1 are recorded.  
7CUE switch  
CH1: The audio CH1 signals are recorded on the  
cue track.  
REAR : The audio input signals supplied from the  
audio component which has been  
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
connectors 5 is recorded.  
MIX : Audio CH1 and CH2 mixed signals are  
recorded on the cue track.  
CH2: The audio CH2 signals are recorded on the  
cue track.  
<Note>  
This switch can be made ineffective using the VTR  
MAIN MENU. (See page 118)  
12 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
Audio function section (2)  
=>  
<Speaker  
The EE sound during recording or the playback  
sound during playback can be monitored through  
this speaker.  
The warning alarms are output in synchronization  
with the flashing or lighting of the warning lamps  
and warning displays.  
The sound heard from the speaker is automatically  
cut off when the earphone is connected to the  
PHONES jack ?.  
<
:
;
=MONITOR SELECT (audio channel selector)  
switch  
This is used to select the audio channels whose  
sound is to be output from the speaker or  
earphone.  
8
CH1: The audio CH1 signals are output.  
1/2 : The audio CH1 and CH2 mixed signals or  
stereo audio signals are output. However,  
only mixed signals are output through the  
speaker.  
?9  
8AUDIO OUT connector (XLR, 5-pin)  
CH2: The audio CH2 signals are output.  
This is connected to the audio component.  
The sound of audio CH1 and the sound of audio  
CH2 are output separately.  
The switching of the recording sound and playback  
sound is coupled with the setting of the MONITOR  
OUT SDI switch. (No sound will be output when  
the SDI switch is at OFF.)  
>MONITOR (audio selector) switch  
This is used to select the sound which is to be  
output to the earphone when “1/2” has been  
selected by the MONITOR SELECT switch =.  
ST : The audio CH1 and CH2 stereo audio signals  
are output.  
MIX : The audio CH1 and CH2 mixed audio signals  
are output.  
9DC OUT (DC power output) socket  
This is the DC 12 V output socket. A current of  
approximately 400 mA can be supplied.  
?PHONES (earphone) jack (mini jack)  
When an earphone (optional accessory) is  
connected, the sound selected by the MONITOR  
switch > can be heard from the earphone. In  
addition, the warning alarms relating to the unit’s  
operations or statuses can be heard through the  
earphone. An earphone which is capable of  
:ALARM (warning alarm volume adjustment)  
control  
This is used to adjust the volume of the warning  
alarms from the earphone which has been  
connected to the speaker < or PHONES jack ?.  
The warning alarms are not audible when this  
control is at its lowest setting.  
delivering  
a
sufficiently high volume is  
recommended. However, when the earphone is  
connected, the sound heard through the speaker <  
will be automatically cut off.  
;MONITOR (volume adjustment) control  
This is used to adjust the volume of all the sound  
delivered through the speaker or earphone except  
for the warning alarms.  
The sound is not audible when this control is at its  
lowest setting.  
13 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
Viewfinder section  
3TALLY switch  
>
<7 8  
This is used to control the front tally lamp 7.  
HIGH : The brightness of the front tally lamp is  
increased.  
OFF : The front tally lamp is turned off.  
LOW : The brightness of the front tally lamp is  
reduced.  
9
;
=
1
4PEAKING control  
This is used to adjust the outlines of the images  
seen inside the viewfinder to make focusing easier.  
Its adjustment does not affect the output signals of  
the camera.  
:
ON  
4 5 2 3 6  
OFF  
(Viewfinder pictured here is the AJ-HVF27P)  
5CONTRAST control  
This is used to adjust the contrast of the picture  
seen inside the viewfinder. Its adjustment does not  
affect the output signals of the camera.  
?
6BRIGHT control  
This is used to adjust the brightness of the picture  
seen inside the viewfinder. Its adjustment does not  
affect the output signals of the camera.  
7Front tally lamp  
This lamp is activated when the TALLY switch 3 is  
set to the HIGH or LOW position, and it lights while  
the VTR unit is recording. It also flashes to provide  
a warning display like the REC lamp inside the  
viewfinder. The lamp’s brightness when it is lit can  
be selected using the TALLY switch (HIGH or  
LOW).  
(For details concerning the viewfinder, refer to the  
operating instructions of the viewfinder.)  
8Lever for securing the viewfinder in the  
back/front and sideways directions  
This lever is loosened when the viewfinder position  
is to be adjusted in the back/front and/or sideways  
directions.  
1Viewfinder (optional accessory)  
While recording or playback is underway, pictures  
can be viewed through the viewfinder in black and  
white. The warning displays concerning the unit’s  
operation statuses and settings, messages, zebra  
patterns and markers (safety zone markers and  
centre marker) can also be seen in the viewfinder.  
9Eyepiece  
:Back tally lamp  
This lamp lights while the VTR unit is recording. It  
also flashes to provide a warning display like the  
REC lamp inside the viewfinder.  
When the lever is set to OFF, the back tally lamp is  
hidden.  
2ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch  
This is used to display the zebra pattern in the  
viewfinder.  
ON : The zebra pattern is displayed.  
;Diopter adjustment ring  
OFF: The zebra pattern is not displayed.  
When the unit is shipped, the zebra pattern is set  
so that an area of less than 85% is displayed with a  
video level of at least 80% or so.  
The required area of zebra pattern can be  
displayed by setting the ZEBRA 1 DETECT,  
ZEBRA 2 DETECT and ZEBRA 2 items on the  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 screen.  
This is adjusted in line with the camera operator’s  
diopter in such a way that the user can see the  
image on the viewfinder screen most clearly.  
<Connecting plug  
=Locking ring  
>Microphone holder  
?Viewfinder stopper screw  
To detach the viewfinder from the camera, first  
loosen the stopper screw, and then remove the  
viewfinder.  
14 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
$ Examples of filter selection  
Shooting (recording)/playback  
function section (1)  
Shooting conditions  
CC filter  
ND filter  
Sunrise, sunset, inside a studio B (3200 K)  
1 (CLEAR)  
Outdoors under a clear sky  
C (4300 K) or 2 (1/4 ND) or  
D (6300 K)  
3 (1/16 ND)  
Outdoors under cloudy or rainy  
skies  
D (6300 K)  
1 (CLEAR) or  
2 (1/4 ND)  
Snowscapes, high mountains,  
C (4300 K) or 3 (1/16 ND) or  
seashores or other perfectly clear D (6300 K)  
scenery  
4 (1/64 ND)  
2
1
2Synchro scan adjustment switches  
These switches become effective when the shutter  
switch 7 is set to ON and SYNCHRO SCAN 2 is  
selected. They are used to adjust the synchro scan  
speed.  
When the “–” switch is pressed, the shutter speed is  
reduced; conversely, when the “+” switch is  
pressed, it is increased.  
During personal computer monitor shooting, etc.  
adjust these switches to the positions where the  
horizontal bar noise inside the viewfinder is  
decreased.  
3
1CC FILTER/ND FILTER (filter selector) control  
This is used to select the filter to match the light  
source which is illuminating the subject. If the  
control setting is changed while the menu display  
mode is set to “3” (default setting), the new setting  
will appear at the setting change message display  
area of the viewfinder screen.  
3WHITE BAL (white balance memory selector)  
switch  
PRST : Set the switch to this position in cases where  
there is not enough time to adjust the white  
balance. The TUNGSTEN (3200 K) white  
balance value is stored in the memory.  
This can be changed to DAY LIGHT (5600  
K).  
A or B : When the AUTO W/B BAL switch 6 is set to  
AWB, the white balance is automatically  
adjusted to match the setting position of the  
CC FILTER control 1, and the adjustment  
value is stored in memory A or memory B.  
When the CC FILTER control and the WHITE BAL  
switch are set to the same positions as they were  
when adjustment was performed, the adjustment  
value stored in the memory is recalled, and the unit  
is automatically adjusted to the white balance that  
corresponds to this value.  
$ Control settings and filter selection  
CC FILTER control (large  
CC filter selection  
diameter) setting  
A
B
C
D
Cross filter  
3200 K  
4300 K  
6300 K  
<Note>  
The colour temperatures shown above are those when the  
LIGHTING item is set to TUNGSTEN or the D5600K item is set to  
OFF on the CAMERA SETTING screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN  
MENU 1.  
ND FILTER control (small  
ND filter selection  
diameter) setting  
If this switch setting is changed while the menu  
display mode is set to “3” (default setting), the new  
setting will appear at the WHITE BAL switch display  
position on the viewfinder screen.  
CLEAR (Transparent)  
1/4 ND  
1
2
3
4
1/16 ND  
1/64 ND  
(Example: “A”)  
OThe two types shown above are provided for filter  
combinations.  
15 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
AUTO KNEE function  
Shooting (recording)/playback  
function section (2)  
If the level is adjusted to people or scenery for shooting when the  
background is very bright, the background becomes subject to  
white-out, causing the buildings and scenery in the background to  
be blurred. When the AUTO KNEE function is activated in a  
situation like this, the background can be reproduced distinctly.  
This function is very effective for shooting in the following  
situations.  
OWhen shooting people in the shade under a clear sky  
OWhen shooting people inside a vehicle or a building and  
outdoor scenery seen through windows at the same time  
OWhen shooting scenes with a high contrast  
5GAIN (gain selector) switch  
This is used to select the gain of the video amplifier  
in accordance with the lighting status during  
shooting. The gain values corresponding to the L,  
M and H settings are specified by the setting menu  
ahead of time.  
If this switch setting is changed while the display  
mode is set to “3,” the new setting will appear at the  
gain display position on the viewfinder screen.  
(Example: “12 dB”)  
6
5 4  
4OUTPUT (output signal selector)/AUTO KNEE  
switch  
6AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white balance/black  
balance adjustment) switch  
This is used to select the video signals which are to  
be output from the camera unit to the VTR unit,  
viewfinder and video monitor.  
The AUTO KNEE function can be used when the  
pictures shot by the camera are selected.  
The operation of the AUTO KNEE function can be  
selected using the AUTO KNEE SW item on the  
CAMERA SW MODE screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN  
MENU 2.  
AWB: This is selected when the white balance is to  
be adjusted automatically. When the WHITE  
BAL switch 3 is set to “A or B” at this time,  
the adjusted value will be stored in memory A  
or memory B.  
ABB : This is selected for automatically adjusting the  
black balance.  
The adjusted value is stored in a dedicated  
memory.  
(The factory setting of the AUTO KNEE function is  
OFF.)  
Black shading is automatically corrected when  
SHD and ABB SW CTRL on the OPTION  
screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 are set  
to ON and the AUTO W/B BAL switch is  
pressed continuously for 8 seconds or more  
on the ABB side.  
$ OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch setting position  
BARS  
Colour bar signals are output.  
The AUTO KNEE circuit is not activated.  
Use this position in the following  
circumstances.  
<Note>  
OWhen the video monitor is to be adjusted  
OWhen the colour bar signals are to be  
recorded  
When white balance or black balance are being  
automatically adjusted and the switch is pressed  
again to either the AWB side or to the ABB side, the  
automatic adjustment for the side pressed will be  
stopped.  
CAM.  
The pictures shot by the camera are output.  
AUTO KNEE OFF The AUTO KNEE circuit is not activated.  
MANUAL KNEE is selected as the default  
setting.  
The adjusted value in this case is the value before  
automatic adjustment was performed.  
CAM.  
AUTO KNEE ON  
The pictures shot by the camera are output.  
The AUTO KNEE circuit is activated.  
16 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
Shooting (recording)/playback  
function section (3)  
9
7
9
8
7SHUTTER switch  
9HD SDI OUT connector (BNC)  
This is set to ON when the electronic shutter is to  
be used. When the SEL side is pressed, the  
shutter speed and mode display are changed in the  
range which was set ahead of time in the setting  
menu.  
If this switch setting is changed while the display  
mode is set to “2” or “3,” the new setting will appear  
at the shutter display position on the viewfinder  
screen.  
The HD SDI signals (video and audio) for the  
monitor in accord with the position of the MONITOR  
OUT SDI switch : are output from here.  
When the SDI switch is at “EE/PB,” the EE video  
and EE audio signals will be output during  
recording and the playback video and playback  
audio signals will be output during playback.  
When the SDI switch is at “EE,” the camera video  
signals are output at all times.  
(Example: “: 1/120”, “: 50%”, “: 180d”)  
When the CHARACTER switch is set to ON while  
performing the menu settings, it is possible to  
superimpose the setting menus onto the pictures  
being shot so that they can be checked on the  
monitor screen.  
8ECU REMOTE (remote control) connector (6-  
pin)  
The AJ-EC3 extension control unit (optional  
accessory) is connected here.  
<Note>  
The user’s bit is also output from the HD SDI OUT  
connector.  
Before connecting or disconnecting the remote  
control cable, be absolutely sure to set the POWER  
switches on the unit and extension control unit to  
the OFF position.  
The active frame count is output to the four higher  
digits of the user’s bit. The count is reset to zero  
each time recording starts, and the count is  
incremented with each active frame.  
The active frame information is output to the lowest  
digit of the user’s bit while the frame rate  
information is output to the third and fourth lower  
digits.  
<Note>  
In order for the time code that matches the  
playback time code, which is output from the HD  
SDI OUT connector, to be output from the TC OUT  
connector, set the SDI switch to “EE/PB,” and  
select “TCG/TCR” as the TC OUT item setting on  
the TC/UB screen.  
17 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
;CHARACTER switch  
Shooting (recording)/playback  
function section (4)  
This controls whether the characters are to be  
superimposed onto the pictures which are output  
from the HD SDI OUT connector.  
ON : The characters are superimposed.  
OFF: The characters are not superimposed.  
<VTR START button  
When this is pressed, recording starts; when it is  
pressed again, recording stops.  
This button functions in the same way as the lens  
VTR button.  
:
=VTR SAVE/STBY (tape protection) switch  
This is used to select the power supply mode when  
the VTR has temporarily stopped recording (REC  
PAUSE mode).  
SAVE: This is the tape protection mode. The  
cylinder is stopped in the half-loading status.  
Less power is consumed than at the STBY  
position, and the operating time provided by  
the battery is prolonged. Compared with the  
STBY position, it takes longer for recording to  
commence after the VTR START button <  
has been pressed.  
When the switch is set to this position, the  
VTR SAVE lamp inside the viewfinder lights.  
STBY : At this position, recording is commenced as  
soon as the VTR START button is pressed.  
<Note>  
<
=
;
:SDI switch  
This is used to select the video and audio signals  
which are to be output from the HD SDI OUT  
connector and the audio signals which are to be  
output from the AUDIO OUT connectors.  
EE/PB : During playback, the playback video and  
playback audio signals are output; in all  
other modes, the EE video and EE audio  
signals are output.  
When the prescribed amount of time has elapsed in  
the STBY mode, the unit is automatically set to the  
SAVE mode. To return the unit to the STBY mode,  
set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE, and then  
again to the STBY position.  
EE  
: The EE video and EE audio signals are  
output at all times.  
OFF : Signal output is stopped. (This serves  
effectively as a power-conserving mode.)  
<Notes>  
OWith the settings at shipment, this function does  
not work at the OFF position when a cable is  
connected to the HD SDI OUT connector. For  
further details, refer to the FUNCTION screen  
(page 114) of the VTR menu.  
During recording, the HD SDI OUT output  
signals cannot be switched from ON to OFF or  
vice versa.  
The status set prior to the  
commencement of recording is maintained.  
OWhen the frame frequency has been set to 60.00  
Hz, the audio signals which are output from the  
HD SDI OUT connector can be controlled on the  
MIC AUDIO screen of VTR MENU.  
However, it should be borne in mind that some  
products may not be able to process properly the  
audio signals which are output from the HD SDI  
OUT connector at this 60.00 Hz frequency  
setting.  
For details, consult your dealer.  
18 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
Shooting (recording)/playback  
function section (5)  
C
D
@
A
B
>
?
E
>MODE CHECK button  
CPLAY/PAUSE button  
While this button is held down, the camera’s setting  
mode is shown in the viewfinder.  
This does not affect the output signals of the  
camera.  
This is pressed to view the playback picture on the  
viewfinder screen or using a colour video monitor.  
The button’s lamp comes on during playback.  
When it is pressed during playback, the unit is set  
to pause in the playback mode (PLAY PAUSE), and  
the button’s lamp flashes. If the unit is left in the  
pause mode for two minutes, it automatically  
changes to the stop (STOP) mode.  
?USER 1 and USER 2 buttons  
A user setting can be allocated to each of these  
buttons using the setting menu.  
When a button is pressed, the user setting mode  
allocated to it is selected.  
DSTOP button  
When the button is pressed again, the selected  
mode is released.  
This is pressed to stop the tape travel.  
EEMERGENCY screw (inside rubber cap)  
If the cassette does not eject even when the EJECT  
button is pressed, use a screwdriver or similar  
implement to push and turn the EMERGENCY  
screw at the same time: this will cause the cassette  
to be ejected.  
@EJECT button  
This is pressed to insert or eject the cassette.  
AREW button  
This is pressed to rewind the tape. The button’s  
lamp comes on during rewinding.  
When it is pressed during playback, the tape will be  
reviewed (rewound and played back) at about twice  
the regular speed while the button is held down.  
BFF button  
This is pressed to fast forward the tape. The  
button’s lamp comes on during fast forwarding.  
When it is pressed during playback, the tape will be  
cued (fast forwarded and played back) at about  
twice the regular speed while the button is held  
down.  
19 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
Warning/status display section  
4
1
2
3
5
1Back tally lamp (unit)  
When the back tally switch 2 is set to ON, this  
lamp serves the same function as the front tally  
lamp in the viewfinder.  
2Back tally switch  
This is used to control the unit’s back tally lamp 1.  
ON : The unit’s back tally lamp is operational.  
OFF: The unit’s back tally lamp is not operational.  
3WARNING lamp  
When a problem of some form or other occurs  
within the VTR unit, this lamp flashes or lights.  
4LIGHT switch  
ON : The display window 5 is illuminated.  
OFF: The illumination of the display window is  
turned off.  
5Display window  
This displays the alarms, remaining battery charge,  
audio levels, time data, etc. relating to the VTR unit.  
20 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
Menu operation section  
3JOG dial button  
When this dial button is turned while the menu  
screen is displayed, the cursor is moved to each of  
the setting items.  
The menu items are set by operating this dial  
button.  
There are two types of menus, MAIN and SUB, and  
each menu is displayed on a page-by-page basis.  
The menu configuration can be changed to suit the  
desired objective.  
For details on the menu operation method, refer to  
“Menu operations” on pages 86 to 88.  
Time code related section (1)  
3
2
1
1Setup card insertion slot  
The setup card, available as an optional accessory,  
is inserted into this slot.  
2MENU button  
When this is pressed, the camera unit’s user menu  
screen, which was set at the time of shipment,  
appears.  
When it is pressed again, the VTR unit’s user menu  
screen appears.  
When it is pressed once more, the menu screen  
display is cleared.  
1
The selection of the menu for the user menu can be  
changed on the USER MENU SELECT screen.  
3 2  
When the power is turned on  
Status display  
1GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)  
Supply the analogue HD reference signal to this  
connector for gen-locking the camera unit or when  
externally locking the time code.  
1A B  
0dB  
CZ73  
Press the MENU  
button.  
<Note>  
Enter the reference signal of the same frame  
¢¢¢¢ FILMUSERMENU¢¢¢¢  
frequency (59.94 Hz or 60.0 Hz) as the unit.  
Camera unit’s user  
menu  
2TC IN connector (BNC)  
Supply the time code which will serve as the  
reference to this connector when externally locking  
the time code.  
Press the MENU  
button.  
3TC OUT connector (BNC)  
¢¢¢¢ VTRUSERMENU¢¢¢¢  
To lock the time code of an external VTR to the  
unit’s time code, connect this connector to the time  
code input (TC IN) connector on the external VTR.  
VTR unit’s user  
menu  
Press the MENU button.  
21 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
Time code related section (2)  
46  
5
9
8 7  
4HOLD button  
7“+” button, “–” button  
The time data display of the counter display section  
which was on the screen at the moment when this  
button is pressed is held. (However, the time code  
generator keeps running.) When the button is  
pressed again, the hold status is released.  
It is used, for instance, to find out the time at which  
a particular scene was shot.  
These are used to increment or decrement by 1 the  
figure in the digit which was made to flash by the  
SHIFT button 8 when the time code or user’s bit is  
to be set.  
8SHIFT button  
This causes the digit to be set to flash when the  
<Note>  
time code or user’s bit is to be set.  
If the HOLD button is pressed and held down while  
the DISPLAY switch 6 has been set to UB,  
“HOLD” on the counter display flashes, and the  
button functions to display the VITC user’s bit  
information recorded in the video AUX area on the  
counter display section.  
9TCG (time code selector) switch  
This is used to set the running mode of the built-in  
time code generator.  
F-RUN : Set here to have the time code run all the  
time regardless of the VTR’s operation.  
This position is used to align the time code  
with the time or externally lock the time  
code.  
SET : Set here when the time code or user’s bit is  
to be set.  
R-RUN : Set here to have the time code run only  
during recording.  
5RESET button  
This is used to reset the time data on the counter  
display section to “00:00:00:00.” If it is pressed  
while the TCG switch 9 is at the SET position, the  
time code data and user’s bit data are respectively  
reset to “00:00:00:00.”  
The time code on the tape with scene-to-  
scene continuity is recorded continuously.  
6DISPLAY switch  
This is used to display the time code, CTL or user’s  
bit on the counter display section depending on the  
setting positions of this switch and the TCG switch  
9.  
UB : The user’s bit is displayed.  
TC : The time code is displayed.  
CTL : CTL is displayed.  
22 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power supply  
A battery pack or an AC power source can be used as  
this unit’s power supply.  
Using the Anton/Bauer battery pack  
Attach the battery pack.  
Insert the pack in the direction shown by the  
arrows, and then slide it into position.  
To use the battery pack, there is a choice of  
makes of batteries below, namely:  
OAnton/Bauer  
1
OIDX  
OSony  
<Note>  
Batteries of other makes can also be supported by  
changing the setting menu but no guarantees are  
made for the system when they are actually used with  
this unit.  
Before using the battery pack, recharge the battery  
using the battery charger.  
(For details on the recharging method, refer to the  
operating instructions of the battery concerned.)  
To detach the battery, pull the battery mount  
removal lever all the way down, and slide the  
battery pack in the direction shown by the arrow.  
2
Removal lever  
Battery pack  
<Note>  
An intelligent battery system and ultra light system are  
supported.  
The remaining battery charge displayed inside the  
viewfinder is usually shown as a percentage of the full  
charge, but when the battery charge is nearly  
completely dissipated, the percentage display is  
replaced with a voltage display.  
23 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power supply  
Using the BP-90 type battery pack  
Attach the NP/BP adapter plate.  
Insert it in the direction shown by the arrows, and  
slide it into place.  
Attach the AU-M402H battery case.  
1
4
Open the battery case cover, and raise it above the  
rubber cap: screw holes will now be visible.  
Tighten the screws using a screwdriver, then  
attach the case to the NP/BP adapter plate and  
tighten the screws fully.  
Attach the connectors provided with the NP/BP  
adapter plate to the positions shown in the figure.  
2
<Notes>  
ODo not pull the rubber cap forcefully.  
OWhen mounting the battery case, take care not to  
pinch the connecting cord.  
Connect the plug on the battery pack to the  
connector inside the case, and insert the battery  
pack.  
5
Connect these connectors with the connector on  
the AU-MA402H battery case.  
3
<Note>  
Before connecting or disconnecting the plug, be  
absolutely sure to turn off the unit’s power.  
24 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power supply  
Using the Sony NP-1/BP-90 battery  
pack  
Using the V-mount type battery  
pack  
Attach the Sony battery holder. As shown in the  
figure, attach the battery case with the cover detached  
and then the detached cover.  
Attach the V-mount adapter plate.  
Insert it in the direction shown by the arrows, and slide  
it into place.  
1Tighten the mounting screws.  
2Tighten the power contact screws.  
3Insert the top of the detached cover in the direction  
shown by the arrows.  
4Align the holes in the bottom of the cover (metal  
part) with the holes at the bottom of the case, and  
use the screws to attach the case.  
<Note>  
When mounting the battery holder, take care not to  
pinch the connecting cord.  
Battery case for NP-1  
1
3
4
2
Please consult your local dealer for any questions  
regarding the NP/BP adapter plate or V-mount  
adapter plate.  
Battery case for BP-90  
1
3
2
4
25 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power supply  
Using an AC power supply  
When the AJ-B75 AC adapter is used  
Connect the DC OUT connector on the AJ-B75 AC  
adapter to the DC IN socket on the unit.  
1
DC IN socket  
Set the power of the AC adapter to ON.  
2
Set the unit’s power switch to ON.  
3
<Notes>  
OCheck the pin signals of the DC IN socket when  
using an external power supply other than the AJ-  
B75 AC adapter. (DC 12 V, 8.5 A)  
OPower from the AC adapter takes precedence when  
both a battery pack and AC adapter have been  
connected.  
OWhen using the AC adapter, be absolutely sure to  
first set the power of the AC adapter to ON and  
then set the unit’s power switch to ON.  
If the power is turned on in the reverse sequence,  
the output voltage of the AC adapter will rise  
gradually, and the unit may malfunction as a result.  
Pin no.  
Signal  
GND  
4
3
1
2, 3  
4
2
==  
1
+12 V  
26 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attaching the lens  
Raise the lever for securing the lens, and detach  
the mount cap.  
Push the cable into the cable clamp, and connect it  
to the LENS socket.  
1
4
Lever for securing  
the lens  
Mount cap  
LENS socket  
<Notes>  
Align the centre mark of the lens with the groove in  
the top centre of the lens mount, and attach the  
lens.  
2
OFor details on handling the lens, refer to the  
operating instructions which accompany the lens.  
OThe following lens adjustments and camera  
adjustments may be necessary depending on the  
lens mounted.  
Mark  
1. Lens flange back adjustment  
2. Lens auto iris operating speed adjustment  
3. Lens white shading adjustment (performed on  
the unit)  
Push down the lever for securing the lens to  
secure the lens.  
3
27 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the lens flange  
If the subject is not focused properly in the telephoto  
and wide-angle modes during zoom operations, adjust  
the flange back (distance from the lens mounting  
surface to the image-forming surface).  
Once this adjustment is done, it need not be redone  
unless the lens is replaced.  
Adjustment method  
<Note>  
For details on the adjustment method and lens  
positions, refer also to the operating instructions that  
accompany the lens.  
Approx. 3  
meters  
Attach the lens to the camera.  
At this stage, do not forget to connect the lens  
cable.  
Shoot the chart used for the flange back  
adjustment, and turn the distance ring to adjust the  
focus.  
1
6
7
Set the lens aperture to manual and open the  
aperture.  
Set the zoom ring to the wide-angle position, and  
turn the F.f ring to adjust the focus.  
Take care not to move the distance ring during this  
process.  
2
Set the lighting in such a way that the appropriate  
3
video output level is achieved at a distance of  
about 3 meters away from the chart used for the  
flange back adjustment.  
If the video level is too high, use the filters and  
shutter.  
Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the focus is adjusted at  
both the telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
8
9
Tighten the screw securing the F.f ring.  
Loosen the screw securing the F.f (flange focus)  
ring.  
<Note>  
4
On some lenses, this may be marked as F.b  
(flange back) ring.  
Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position either  
manually or electrically.  
5
28 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the white shading  
This unit can store up to 8 white shading  
compensations as white shading files in memory.  
Using this data, it is possible to quickly reproduce the  
appropriate white shading adjustment even after  
switching lenses.  
Follow the procedure described below when repeating  
a white shading adjustment or when creating a new  
white shading file.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “VF DISPLAY” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 2.  
4
5
<VFDISPLAY>  
n
DISPCONDITION  
DISPMODE  
VFOUT  
:NORMAL  
:3  
:Y  
VFDTL  
:4  
ZEBRA1DETECT  
ZEBRA2DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
:080%  
:085%  
:SPOT  
:45%  
White shading files  
Storing of white shading adjustment values in memory  
for each lens changed and reading of data which has  
been stored are performed using the menus.  
LOWLIGHTLVL  
SYNCHROSCANDISP.:deg  
ECUMENUDISP. :ON  
<Notes>  
OThe method below can be used for the white  
shading adjustments with most lenses. However,  
with some very special lenses, a different  
adjustment method may be necessary.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the ZEBRA1 DETECT item, and press  
the JOG dial button.  
OEven when the white shading has been adjusted,  
tinting may occur in the vertical direction near the  
lens aperture open position. This is a phenomenon  
which is inherent to lenses and optical systems and  
is not indicative of malfunctioning.  
Turn the JOG dial button, select 70% and then  
press the JOG dial button to enter the setting.  
6
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6, however this time set the  
ZEBRA2 DETECT to 85% and ZEBRA2 to SPOT.  
Storing white shading adjustment values  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the <VF DISPLAY> item, and press the  
JOG dial button.  
Attach the lens to the camera.  
At this stage, do not forget to connect the lens  
cable.  
1
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 item.  
9
Set the electronic shutter to OFF, and set the gain  
to “L (0 dB).”  
2
Press the JOG dial button until FILM (CAM)  
10  
MAIN MENU 4 is displayed, then turn the JOG  
dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
WHITE SHADING item, and press the JOG dial  
button again.  
2222  
2222  
FILMMAINMENU4  
FILMUSERMENUSELECT1  
FILMUSERMENUSELECT2  
FILMUSERMENUSELECT3  
BLACKSHADING  
WHITESHADING  
FLARE  
n
COLORIMETRY  
INITIALIZE  
DIAGNOSTIC  
EVALUATION  
OPTION  
GAIN: L (0 dB)  
SHUTTER: OFF  
If the lens is provided with an extender, disengage  
the extender function.  
3
29 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the white shading  
Select the file No.  
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until  
the character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character  
displayed is switched in the following sequence:  
16  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
11  
(cursor) to the SELECT item  
Space: )  
7
letters: A—Z  
Press the JOG dial button and the file number  
will flash. Turn the JOG dial button to select the  
file (1 to 8) to be recorded.  
12  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
<WHITESHADING>  
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –, . , x  
SELECT  
READ  
:1  
n
DETECTION(VSAW)  
CORRECT  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
:ON  
17  
18  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the next position (right), and repeat  
steps 16 and 17 to set the characters  
(maximum of 12).  
When the title has been input, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:”  
position.  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file  
number.  
19  
13  
<WHITESHADING>  
Give a title to the selected file.  
SELECT  
:1  
READ  
DETECTION(VSAW)  
CORRECT  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “TITLE : ” item.  
:ON  
14  
m
222222222222  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
<WHITESHADING>  
SELECT  
READ  
:1  
DETECTION(VSAW)  
CORRECT  
:ON  
TITLE:  
n
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) returns to the TITLE: item.  
20  
21  
<WHITESHADING>  
SELECT  
:1  
READ  
DETECTION(VSAW)  
CORRECT  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) moves to the title input area, and the  
input mode is established.  
:ON  
15  
222222222222  
TITLE:  
n
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
<WHITESHADING>  
SELECT  
:1  
READ  
DETECTION(VSAW)  
CORRECT  
:ON  
m
TITLE:  
Press the MENU button twice to close the menu  
screen.  
1:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
30 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the white shading  
Performing white shading adjustments  
Repeat step 24.  
26  
27  
Set the ZEBRA switch on the viewfinder to ON.  
22  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “WHITE SHADING” screen of  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
Shoot a sheet of white paper devoid of colour  
irregularities.  
<Note>  
23  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the DETECTION (V SAW) item.  
28  
Since flicker tends to occur under fluorescent  
lights, mercury lamps and other such lights, use  
a source of light such as sunlight or a halogen  
lamp which does not tend to produce flicker.  
<WHITESHADING>  
SELECT  
READ  
:1  
DETECTION(VSAW)  
CORRECT  
n
:ON  
Set the lens aperture to manual, and adjust the  
lens aperture in such a way that ZEBRA fills the  
whole screen.  
Check that the lens aperture is between F/4 and  
F/11.  
222222222222  
TITLE:  
24  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
<Notes>  
OSince unevenness in the lighting will make it  
impossible for ZEBRA to fill part of the  
screen, try adjusting the lighting position, etc.  
OTry adjusting the lighting position, etc. also  
when the lens aperture is not between F/4  
and F/11.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the  
following message appears.  
29  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
OAlways be sure to leave the electronic shutter  
at OFF.  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE  
:
1Set the WHITE BAL selector switch to “A” or  
25  
“B,” and initiate the automatic white balance  
(AWB) adjustment using the AUTO W/B BAL  
switch.  
DETECT?  
YES  
NO  
n
2Initiate the automatic black balance (ABB)  
adjustment using the AUTO W/B BAL switch.  
3Initiate the automatic white balance (AWB)  
adjustment again using the AUTO W/B BAL  
switch.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
“ACTIVE” appears on the screen to indicate that  
automatic adjustment of white shading is being  
performed.  
30  
31  
“END” appears on the screen upon completion  
of the adjustment.  
Press the MENU button twice upon completion  
of the adjustment.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
WHITE BAL switch:  
“A” or “B”  
AUTO W/B BAL  
switch  
31 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the white shading  
If the lens is provided with an extender, engage  
the extender function, and repeat steps 24 to  
31.  
The compensation values for when the lens  
extender function is provided and for when it is  
not are both stored in one file in memory.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the READ item  
5
6
32  
<WHITESHADING>  
SELECT  
:1  
READ  
n
DETECTION(VSAW)  
CORRECT  
:ON  
TITLE:  
The white shading adjustment is now complete.  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
The adjusted values are retained in the non-volatile  
memory so that there is no need to adjust the white  
shading again even after the unit’s power is turned off.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
Reading white shading files  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “WHITE SHADING” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
1
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
:1  
:1  
READUSERDATA  
<WHITESHADING>  
n
TITLE  
:
SELECT  
:1  
READ  
DETECTION(VSAW)  
CORRECT  
READ?  
YES  
NO  
:ON  
n
TITLE:  
1:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The recorded data from the white shading file is  
read.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SELECT item  
2
3
Press the MENU button twice.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
Press the JOG dial button and the file number will  
flash. Turn the JOG dial button to select the file (1  
to 8) to be read.  
<WHITESHADING>  
SELECT  
READ  
:1  
n
DETECTION(VSAW)  
CORRECT  
:ON  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number.  
4
32 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the viewfinder  
(The viewfinder is an optional accessory.)  
Attaching the viewfinder  
Detaching the viewfinder  
Check that the camera’s POWER switch is at OFF.  
Check that the camera’s POWER switch is at OFF.  
1
2
1
2
Connect the plug to the viewfinder connecting  
terminal.  
<Note>  
Loosen the stopper screw, pull the viewfinder  
straight up, and draw it out.  
<Note>  
When connecting the plug to the viewfinder  
connecting terminal, push the plug firmly into  
place.  
Use both hands to draw the viewfinder out. It may  
not be possible to remove the viewfinder smoothly  
with one hand, which may cause damage to it.  
Stopper screw  
Push the viewfinder down.  
3
4
Disconnect the plug from the viewfinder connecting  
terminal.  
3
Tighten the stopper screw firmly.  
Stopper screw  
33 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the viewfinder  
(The viewfinder is an optional accessory.)  
Adjusting the viewfinder position  
Pull up the lever for securing the viewfinder in the  
back/front and sideways directions to disengage  
the lock.  
1
Lever  
Viewfinder  
Loosen the lever for securing the viewfinder in the  
back/front and sideways directions.  
2
3
4
Move the viewfinder in the back/front and sideways  
directions, and adjust its position.  
Tighten the lever for securing the viewfinder in the  
back/front and sideways directions until it locks the  
viewfinder in place.  
34 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio input preparation  
When attaching a microphone to  
the viewfinder (optional accessory)  
for use  
The microphone of the AJ-MC700P mic kit (optional  
accessory) can be attached to the viewfinder.  
Open the mic holder.  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches to “FRONT”  
in accordance with the audio channel or channels  
whose sound is to be recorded.  
1
4
AJ-HVF27P  
Mic holder  
Attach the microphone, and tighten the locking  
screw.  
2
Locking  
screw  
AUDIO IN switches  
Connect the microphone’s connecting cable to the  
MIC IN jack on the camera.  
3
MIC IN jack  
35 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio input preparation  
When attaching a microphone to  
the main unit for use  
Attaching the AJ-MH700P mic holder (optional  
accessory)  
Remove the screws used to attach the mic holder.  
Connect the microphone’s connecting cable to the  
MIC IN jack on the camera.  
1
4
5
MIC IN jack  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches to “FRONT”  
in accordance with the audio channel or channels  
whose sound is to be recorded.  
Attach the mic holder to the main unit using the  
screws provided with the AJ-MH700P mic holder.  
2
Screws provided with mic holder  
Attach the microphone to the mic holder, and  
tighten the locking screw.  
3
Locking screw  
AUDIO IN switches  
36 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio input preparation  
When connecting a microphone to  
the MIC IN jack  
When connecting a microphone to  
the AUDIO IN connector  
Connect the microphone’s connecting cable to the  
MIC IN jack on the camera.  
Connect the microphone’s connecting cable to the  
1
1
AUDIO IN connector on the camera.  
Two microphones can be connected to the CH1  
and CH2 connectors.  
MIC IN jack  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches to “FRONT”  
in accordance with the audio channel or channels  
whose sound is to be recorded.  
2
AUDIO IN  
connectors  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches for the  
channel or channels to which the microphone or  
microphones have been connected to “REAR.”  
2
AUDIO IN switches  
<Note>  
When extending the microphone’s connecting cable,  
use a cable which supports the phantom power supply  
system.  
AUDIO IN switches  
<Note>  
When the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch is set to  
“+48V,” the phantom power supply system is  
supported.  
37 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio input preparation  
When using a wireless microphone  
When connecting audio components  
Attach the WX-RJ700 wireless receiver when  
Panasonic’s wireless system is to be used.  
Connect the AUDIO IN connectors on the camera  
with the audio component using the XLR cable.  
1
Attach the WX-RJ700 wireless receiver to the WX-  
ZJ770 camera attachment.  
1
Align the grooves in the camera attachment with  
the pins on the battery case, etc. to attach the  
wireless receiver.  
2
Audio output connectors  
WX-RJ700 wireless  
receiver  
AUDIO IN  
connectors  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches for the  
channel or channels to which the audio component  
has been connected to “REAR.”  
2
WX-ZJ770 camera  
attachment  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the rear  
panel to “LINE.”  
3
XLR cable  
AUDIO IN  
connectors  
AUDIO IN  
switches  
Connect the AUDIO IN connectors on the camera  
with the wireless receiver using the XLR cable.  
3
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches for the  
channel or channels to which the XLR cable has  
been connected to “REAR.”  
4
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the rear  
panel to “MIC.”  
5
LINE/MIC/+48V  
selector switch  
When detaching the wireless receiver, push up  
the lever on the bottom panel of the camera  
attachment to disengage it.  
AUDIO IN switches  
<Note>  
For details on the operations and other aspects of the  
WX-RJ700 wireless receiver, refer to the operating  
instructions which accompany the receiver.  
38 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mounting the unit on a tripod  
Use the tripod attachment available as an optional  
accessory for mounting the unit onto a tripod.  
Detaching the unit from the tripod attachment  
While pressing the red lever, move the black lever in  
the direction of the arrow, slide the unit toward the  
rear, and detach it.  
Attach the tripod attachment to the tripod.  
1
<Note>  
Tripod attachment  
Select the attachment holes that best support the  
centre of gravity of the unit and tripod attachment.  
Check that the diameters of the selected holes  
match the diameters of the pan head.  
Black lever  
Red lever  
<Note>  
Tripod attachment  
If the pins in the tripod attachment fail to return to  
their original positions after the camera has been  
detached, press the red lever again and at the same  
time move the black lever in the direction of the  
arrow: this will return the pins to their original  
positions.  
Pan head  
Bear in mind that the camera cannot be attached  
while the pins are left in the centre.  
Attach the camera to the tripod attachment.  
Slide the camera toward the front along the  
grooves until it clicks into place.  
2
39 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attaching the shoulder strap  
Attach the shoulder strap to the shoulder strap  
mounting hooks, and adjust the length of the strap.  
<Note>  
To detach the shoulder strap, open the clips on the  
mounting parts and detach.  
1
Check that the shoulder strap is securely fastened.  
The clip opens when it  
is pressed here.  
Shoulder strap  
The clip opens  
when it is  
pressed here.  
<Note>  
This mounting hook is for attaching the tape measure  
that is used to measure the subject distance.  
It is not to be used for the shoulder strap.  
Adjusting the shoulder pad position  
The shoulder pad can be slid up to 15 mm either  
backward or forward from the centre position (factory  
setting).  
Adjust the pad’s position to operate the unit with the  
optimum ease.  
Loosen the two screws.  
1
Slide the shoulder pad either backward or forward,  
and find the optimum position.  
2
Tighten the screws to secure the shoulder pad.  
3
Screws  
Shoulder pad  
1•3  
2
Bottom section  
40 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attaching the rain cover  
Example showing use of the SHAN-  
RC700 rain cover  
Tighten the cord.  
Close using the fastener.  
Close using the fastener.  
Connecting the extension control unit  
By connecting the AJ-EC3 extension control unit  
(optional accessory), some of the functions can be  
operated by remote control.  
When the AJ-EC3 is connected and the POWER  
switches on the unit and AJ-EC3 are set to ON, the  
unit is automatically set to the remote control mode.  
<Notes>  
OBefore connecting or disconnecting the dedicated  
cable, be absolutely sure to set the POWER  
switches on the unit and AJ-EC3 to OFF.  
OWhen “OFF” has been selected as the ECU DATA  
SAVE setting on the CAMERA SW MODE screen  
of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2, all the adjustments  
and settings made using the AJ-EC3 will be cleared  
when the unit’s power switch is set to OFF. Neither  
is it possible to save these adjustments and  
settings on a setup card.  
Dedicated cable  
However, the menu item settings can be saved on  
a setup card.  
When the AJ-EC3 is connected again, its settings  
will be restored.  
OWhen “ON” has been selected as the ECU DATA  
SAVE setting on the CAMERA SW MODE screen  
of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2, all the adjustments  
and settings made using the AJ-EC3 will not be  
cleared even when the unit’s power switch is set to  
OFF.  
AJ-  
6
5
1
ECU connector  
AJ-EC3  
41 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder lamp displays  
1
TALLY / REC  
BATT  
VTR  
Viewfinder pictured here is the AJ-HVF27P  
(For details concerning the viewfinder, refer to  
the operating instructions of the viewfinder.)  
SAVE  
3
2
4
1TALLY/REC (recording) lamp  
4VTR SAVE (VTR power-saving) lamp  
This lights when the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set  
to SAVE. It goes off during recording.  
<Note>  
This lights up (red) during recording. It flashes  
when a problem has occurred.  
For details, refer to the section on the “Warning  
system” (pages 124, 125).  
In the rec pause mode, the SAVE mode is  
established automatically, and the lamp lights after  
the time set for the pause timer (temporary stop  
time) has elapsed.  
After two minutes in the play pause mode, the  
SAVE mode is established automatically, and the  
lamp lights.  
2BATT (battery) lamp  
This starts flashing when the battery voltage has  
dropped to the level where the battery will no longer  
be usable in several minutes’ time, and it lights  
when the battery is no longer usable. To prevent  
operation from being interrupted, replace the  
battery before the battery has discharged  
completely.  
For details, refer to the section on the “Warning  
system” (pages 124, 125).  
3
(abnormal operating status warning) lamp  
This lights when the unit is set to an abnormal  
operating status for any of the items set to “ON” on  
the “!LED” screen of the setting menu.  
For details on selecting the items targeted for the  
lamp display, refer to the section on “Setting the  
lamp displays” (next page).  
42 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder lamp displays  
Setting the  
lamp displays  
Select the items targeted for the  
lamp display on  
Setting item  
GAIN (0 dB)  
Description of setting  
the “!LED” screen of the FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
screen. (Under the factory settings, the “!LED” screen  
is not displayed.)  
To perform operations on the “!LED” screen, either  
switch the unit to the engineer mode menu or select  
the “!LED” screen on the FILM (CAM) USER MENU  
SELECT 2 screen under the FILM (CAM) MAIN  
MENU 4 screen.  
Lamp display appears when the gain is  
set to a value other than “0 dB.”  
GAIN (–3 dB)  
SHUTTER  
Lamp display appears when the gain is  
set to a value other than “–3 dB.”  
Lamp display appears when the  
SHUTTER switch is at ON.  
WHITE PRESET  
Lamp display appears when “PRST”  
applies to the channel in the white  
balance memory.  
<Note>  
For details on selecting the engineer mode menu and  
display screens, refer to “Menu operations” (pages 86  
to 88).  
EXTENDER  
FILTER  
Lamp display appears when the lens  
extender is used.  
Lamp display appears when the filter is  
set to a value other than “3200 K.”  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88) to  
open the “!LED” screen.  
BLACK STR  
Lamp display appears when the black  
stretch is at ON.  
1
DAY LIGHT  
(FILM MENU)  
Lamp display appears when the white  
balance presetting is DAY LIGHT.  
<!LED>  
n
D5600K  
(CAM MENU)  
Lamp display appears when the white  
balance presetting is 5600 K.  
GAIN(0dB)  
GAIN(–3dB)  
SHUTTER  
:ON  
:OFF  
:ON  
WHITEPRESET  
EXTENDER  
FILTER  
BLACKSTR  
DAYLIGHT  
MATRIX  
:OFF  
:ON  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
MATRIX  
Lamp display appears when the matrix is  
at ON.  
COLOR  
CORRECTION  
Lamp display appears when the colour  
correction is at ON.  
COLORCORRECTION:OFF  
FRAMERATE :ON  
FRAME RATE  
Lamp display appears when the frame  
rate has been set to 11 fps or below.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the desired item.  
2
3
For the selected item, press the JOG dial button,  
and set whether or not the item is to be displayed  
on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button, select display (ON) or no  
display (OFF) and press the JOG dial button to  
enter the selection.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set ON or OFF for the  
4
5
other items.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
43 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder screen status displays  
In addition to the pictures shot, the unit’s settings and  
messages indicating its operating statuses are  
displayed on the viewfinder screen. The centre  
marker and safety zone markers also appear.  
The items which have been set to ON by the switches  
relating to the viewfinder displays or the VF DISPLAY  
screen of the setting menu are displayed at the top  
and bottom of the screen.  
When settings have been changed or adjustments  
have been made, messages advising the user of what  
has been set, what progress has been made in the  
adjustments and what the adjustment results are can  
be displayed for about 3 seconds.  
$ Display items and where they are displayed  
1 Extender display  
2 Shutter speed/mode display  
3 Remaining tape display  
4 Battery voltage display  
5 Filter display  
6 White balance memory display  
7 Gain display  
8 Audio level display  
9 Aperture display  
: Camera warning/information display  
; Safety zone markers  
< Centre marker  
= Super iris ON display  
> Zoom position display  
? TCG display  
@ Master gain setting display  
A Colour temperature display PRE/A/B  
B Battery type  
C Total tape length  
D Preset colour temperature display  
E VTR warning/information display  
F Interval recording mode display (flashing)  
G AUDIO CH1/CH2 input display  
H Frame rate information display  
I
lamp information display  
J Frame frequency information display  
KOperation mode display  
H
2
A =  
3
C
4
;
;
B
24 1/250 S  
EX2  
10min 14.6V  
/46 BP402  
1
@
I
<
:
?
J
K
D
E
F
59.9  
F
TCG 00:00:00:00  
!D.L.  
1B A 12dB  
iREC  
F5.6 Z99  
;
;
5
6
7
8
G
9
>
44 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder screen status displays  
1Extender display  
9Aperture display  
This appears when the lens extender is being used.  
This indicates the approximate aperture setting (F  
number).  
2Shutter speed/mode display  
This indicates the shutter speed or shutter mode  
setting.  
<Note>  
This appears when a lens with an aperture display  
function is being used.  
The unit in which the shutter speed is displayed can  
be set on the VF DISPLAY screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2.  
:Camera warning/information display  
The black balance, white balance, auto knee  
function, super iris, super gain and other alarm  
displays and warnings appear here.  
OOFF (no display):  
The shutter is not used.  
O1/100, 1/120, 1/250 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000  
(180d, 172.8d, 144d, 120d, 90d, 45d):  
Shutter speeds in the fixed mode  
O3.0d to 350.0d/0.8% to 97.2% (SYNCHRO  
SCAN):  
;Safety zone markers  
These indicate the 80% or 90% (factory setting)  
range of the surface area of the viewfinder screen.  
The display range proportion is set on the VF  
DISPLAY screen of the setting menu.  
For details, refer to “Setting the marker displays”  
(page 49).  
Selection of synchro scan mode  
In the synchro scan mode, “Y” appears  
immediately in front of the number displayed.  
3Remaining tape display  
<Centre marker  
During recording, this shows the remaining tape (in  
minutes) in the VTR. When less than two minutes  
of tape remain, the figure starts flashing.  
This indicates the centre of the viewfinder screen.  
The display is set ON or OFF on the VF DISPLAY  
screen of the setting menu.  
4Battery voltage display  
=Super iris ON display  
This indicates the battery voltage (V) during  
“S” appears when the super iris is ON.  
operation.  
The voltage is displayed as a  
percentage when a digital battery is used.  
>Zoom position display  
The distance from the WIDE end to TEL end of the  
zoom lens is indicated here as a number from 0 to  
99.  
5Filter display  
This indicates the type of filter selected.  
6White balance memory display  
?TCG display  
This indicates the automatic adjustment memory  
This indicates the time code generator value.  
selected for the white balance.  
A: The WHITE BAL switch has been set to “A.”  
B: The WHITE BAL switch has been set to “B.”  
P: The WHITE BAL switch has been set to “PRST.”  
@Master gain setting display  
The GAIN L/M/H values currently set appear here  
when the MODE CHECK button is pressed.  
7Gain display  
AColour temperature display PRE/A/B  
This indicates the gain (dB) of the video amplifier  
This indicates the colour temperature when AWB is  
which was set using the GAIN switch.  
executed using white balance memory A or B.  
8Audio level display  
This indicates the audio level (which can be  
displayed separately for audio CH1 and CH2).  
During sine wave input, it roughly corresponds with  
the VTR’s level meter as shown below.  
Audio level display  
VTR’s level meter  
+
0
-40 -30 -25 -18/20 -15 -10 -5  
45 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder screen status displays  
BBattery type  
Selecting the display items  
This indicates the type of battery selected.  
The items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen  
can each be set to ON or OFF on the “VF  
INDICATOR” screen of the FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU  
2 or on the “VTR VF INDICATOR” screen of the VTR  
MENU.  
CTotal tape length  
This indicates the total length of the cassette tape.  
DPreset colour temperature display  
This indicates the preset white balance value.  
Selectable items  
EVTR warning/information display  
Alarm displays such as SLACK, REC WARNING,  
HUMID, SERVO and RF as well as other warnings  
are indicated here.  
On the “VF INDICATOR” screen of FILM (CAM)  
MENU  
OExtender display (EXTENDER)  
OShutter speed/mode display (SHUTTER)  
OFilter display (FILTER)  
FInterval recording mode display (flashing)  
OWhite balance memory display (WHITE)  
OGain display (GAIN)  
GAUDIO CH1/CH2 input display  
The input signals to be recorded in audio channels  
1 and 2 are indicated here.  
OAperture value and super iris ON display (IRIS)  
OCamera ID display (CAMERA ID)  
OZoom position display (ZOOM LVL)  
OColour temperature display (COLOR TEMP)  
OFrame rate display (FRAME RATE)  
OGamma curve display (VERSION ID)  
<Note>  
HFrame rate information display  
This indicates the frame rate which has been set.  
I
lamp information display  
This indicates the information when the  
has lit.  
lamp  
The camera ID appears when colour bar signals  
are to be recorded in accordance with the  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch setting.  
For details, refer to “Setting the camera ID” (page  
50).  
JFrame frequency information display  
This indicates the frame frequency (59.94 Hz or  
60.00 Hz) which has been set.  
KOperation mode display  
<VFINDICATOR>  
n
This indicates the unit’s operation mode (F: FILM or  
V: VIDEO) which has been set.  
EXTENDER  
SHUTTER  
FILTER  
WHITE  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
GAIN  
IRIS  
CAMERAID  
ZOOMLVL  
:ON  
:S+IRIS  
:ON  
:OFF  
COLORTEMP :ON  
FRAMERATE :ON  
VERSIONID :ON  
46 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder screen status displays  
On the “VTR VF INDICATOR” screen of VTR MENU  
Selecting the display items  
ORemaining tape display (TAPE)  
ORemaining battery charge display (BATTERY)  
OLevel meter display (LEVEL METER)  
OTime code display (TC)  
OVTR warning display (VTR WARNING)  
OSAVE lamp display (SAVE LED)  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88) to  
open the “VF INDICATOR” screen.  
1
<VFINDICATOR>  
n
EXTENDER  
SHUTTER  
FILTER  
WHITE  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
<VTRVFINDICATOR>  
n
GAIN  
IRIS  
CAMERAID  
ZOOMLVL  
COLORTEMP :ON  
FRAMERATE :ON  
VERSIONID :ON  
:ON  
:S+IRIS  
:ON  
TAPE(IND)  
BATTERY(IND)  
LEVELMETER(IND) :CH1  
AUDIOIN(IND)  
TC(IND)  
VTRWARNING(IND) :NORMAL  
SAVELED :SAVE  
:ON  
:ON  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
<VTRVFINDICATOR>  
n
TAPE(IND)  
BATTERY(IND)  
:ON  
:ON  
LEVELMETER(IND) :CH1  
AUDIOIN(IND)  
TC(IND)  
:OFF  
:OFF  
VTRWARNING(IND) :NORMAL  
SAVELED :SAVE  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the desired item.  
2
3
For the selected item, press the JOG dial button,  
and set whether or not the item is to be displayed  
on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select display (ON) or  
no display (OFF), and press the JOG dial button to  
enter the selection.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set ON or OFF for other  
4
5
items.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
47 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder screen status displays  
Display modes and setting  
change messages  
The display of messages advising the user of what  
changes have been made to the settings and what the  
adjustment results are can be turned off for some or  
all of the items displayed.  
Setting change/adjustment result messages and display modes  
Display mode  
setting  
Situation in which message is displayed  
Message  
1
2
3
When the filter selection has been changed  
When the gain setting has been changed  
Filter: n (n=1, 2, 3, 4), m (m=A, B, C, D)  
t
t
t
t
GAIN: n dB  
(n= –6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30)  
When the WHITE BAL switch setting has been WHITE: n (n=ACH, BCH, PRESET)  
changed  
t
t
t
When the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch has  
been set to AUTO KNEE or OFF  
<Note>  
AUTO KNEE: ON (or OFF)  
This display is shown for about 3 seconds  
immediately after the unit’s power has been  
switched on.  
When the shutter speed/mode setting has been SS: 1/100 (or 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
t
t
t
changed  
S.SCAN, 3.0d to 350.0d, 0.8% to 97.2%)  
When the white balance (AWB) has been  
adjusted  
Example) AWB: OK  
For details, refer to “Adjusting the white balance”  
(pages 53 to 56).  
When the black balance (ABB) has been  
adjusted  
Example) ABB: OK  
For details, refer to “Adjusting the black balance”  
(page 57).  
: Message is to be displayed.  
t : Message is not to be  
displayed.  
<Note>  
The message displays also depend on the status of  
other menu settings. For instance, even when “1 (no  
display)” is set as the filter selection, the filter  
selection will be displayed when FILTER is set to “ON”  
on the VF INDICATOR screen.  
48 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder screen status displays  
Switching the display mode  
Setting the marker displays  
The display mode settings are switched on the VF  
DISPLAY screen.  
The centre marker and safety zone marker displays  
are set on the VF MARKER screen.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88) to  
open the “VF DISPLAY” screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88) to  
open the “VF MARKER” screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2.  
1
1
<VFDISPLAY>  
n
<VFMARKER>  
n
DISPCONDITION  
DISPMODE  
VFOUT  
:NORMAL  
:3  
:Y  
SAFETYZONE :3  
CENTERMARK :ON  
FRAMESIG  
MARK  
:4:3  
:OFF  
:15  
VFDTL  
:4  
ZEBRA1DETECT  
ZEBRA2DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
:080%  
:085%  
:SPOT  
:45%  
LVL  
LOWLIGHTLVL  
SYNCHROSCANDISP.:deg  
ECUMENUDISP. :ON  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “DISP MODE” item.  
Perform the same operations as for the “VF  
DISPLAY” screen to set each item.  
2
3
2
Press the JOG dial button, and set the desired  
display mode.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select the display  
contents, and press the JOG dial button to enter  
the selection.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
49 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder screen status displays  
Setting the camera ID  
The camera ID is set on the CAMERA ID screen.  
Up to ten alphanumerics, symbols and spaces can be  
used.  
<Note>  
The camera ID is not displayed while the setting menu  
is displayed even if colour bar signals are output.  
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed  
is switched in the following sequence:  
4
Space: )  
7
letters: A—Z  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88) to  
open the “CAMERA ID” screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2.  
1
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
<CAMERAID>  
n
2222222222  
ID1:  
ID2:  
ID3:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
5
6
2222222222  
2222222222  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the next position (right), and repeat  
steps 4 and 5 to set the characters.  
When the characters have been input, turn the  
JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
“:” position.  
7
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “ID 1: to 3:” item.  
2
3
<CAMERAID>  
m
<CAMERAID>  
2222222222  
2222222222  
2222222222  
ID1:  
ID2:  
ID3:  
2222222222  
2222222222  
2222222222  
ID1:  
ID2:  
ID3:  
n
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) returns to the ID 1:, ID 2: or ID 3: item.  
8
9
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) moves to the ID input area, and the input  
mode is established.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
<CAMERAID>  
m
2222222222  
2222222222  
2222222222  
ID1:  
ID2:  
ID3:  
<Note>  
The camera ID is recorded at the same time as the  
colour bar signals if “CAMERA ID” on the VF  
INDICATOR screen has been set to “ON.”  
50 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen displays  
Remaining battery charge and  
audio channel level and  
remaining tape displays  
Displays relating to time codes  
These displays light for the time code, CTL and actual  
time  
DF  
: Drop frame mode  
SLAVE : External locking of the time code  
HOLD : Time code generator in the hold mode (when the  
HOLD button has been pressed)  
Remaining tape display  
The remaining tape time is displayed using 7 segments.  
The remaining tape time indicated by each segment is set  
to 3 minutes or 5 minutes using TAPE REMAIN/ $ on the  
VTR MENU “BATTERY/TAPE” screen. Each time the  
number of minutes set for the segments elapses, one  
segment is cleared. (See page 116)  
EMPHASIS  
DF SLAVE TCG HOLD  
0
10  
h
min  
s
frm  
EMPHASIS  
DF SLAVE TCG HOLD  
0
TAPE  
20  
E
F
10  
30  
40  
h
min  
s
frm  
BATT  
TAPE  
20  
-dB  
RF SERVO HUMID SLACK  
CH1  
CH2  
E
F
30  
40  
BATT  
Time counter display  
This displays the time code, CTL, user’s bit and actual  
time. For the correlation between the items displayed and  
the switches, refer to the next section.  
-dB  
RF SERVO HUMID SLACK  
CH1  
CH2  
Remaining battery charge display  
If a battery with a digital display (% display) is used, all 7  
segments up to the “F” position light when the 70% or  
more of the battery charge remains.  
When there is less than 70% of the battery charge  
remaining, the segments go out one by one in sequence  
every time the remaining charge drops by 10%.  
Time code-related switch settings and display  
items  
TCG switch  
position  
DISPLAY switch  
position  
Display item  
Time code  
User’s bit  
CTL  
Audio channel level meter  
TC or CTL  
UB  
SET  
Displays relating to errors and  
warnings  
CTL  
F-RUN or R-RUN  
TC  
Time code  
User’s bit  
Error code display  
EMPHASIS  
DF SLAVE TCG HOLD  
UB  
0
10  
<Note>  
h
min  
s
frm  
If the HOLD button is pressed while the DISPLAY  
switch is set to UB, “HOLD” on the counter display will  
flash for as long as the switch is held down, and the  
VITC user’s bit information recorded in the video AUX  
area will appear on the counter display.  
TAPE  
20  
E
F
30  
40  
BATT  
-dB  
RF SERVO HUMID SLACK  
Warning displays  
CH1  
CH2  
RF : Clogged video head  
SERVO: Servo disturbance  
HUMID : Formation of condensation on the head drum  
SLACK: Problem in tape take-up  
For details, refer to “Warning system” (pages 124 and  
125).  
51 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the date and time  
Adjustments and setup using  
the setting menus  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “TIME/DATE” screen of VTR MAIN  
MENU.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
1
5
<TIME/DATE>  
n
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
:02  
:01  
:01  
:00  
:00  
<Note>  
The seconds cannot be set. The time always  
advances from 0 seconds.  
$TIME/DATESET  
Turn the JOG dial button to select the item to be  
changed, and press the JOG dial button.  
2
<TIME/DATE>  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
:02  
:01  
:01  
:00  
:00  
n
$TIME/DATESET  
Turn the JOG dial button to change the setting,  
and press the JOG dial button to enter the setting.  
3
4
When the settings are completed, turn the JOG  
dial button to select $ TIME/DATE SET, and press  
the JOG dial button.  
<TIME/DATE>  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
:02  
:01  
:01  
:00  
:00  
$TIME/DATESET  
n
52 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the white balance and black balance  
Adjusting the white balance  
A better picture can be achieved by adjusting the  
Set the switches as shown in the figure.  
1
white balance and black balance in the following  
sequence: AWB (white balance adjustment) 5 ABB  
(black balance adjustment) 5 AWB.  
There is usually no need to re-adjust the black  
balance even when the power has been turned off  
and back on.  
The white balance must always be re-adjusted when  
the lighting conditions have changed.  
If the display mode is set to “2” or “3,” messages  
advising the user of what progress has been made in  
the adjustments and what the adjustment results are  
appear on the viewfinder screen when the black  
balance or white balance adjustment is commenced.  
Set the display mode to “1” if these messages are not  
to be displayed.  
OFor details on the display mode settings, refer to  
“Display modes and setting change messages”  
(page 48).  
WHITE BAL: A or B  
OUTPUT: CAM  
FILTER control  
GAIN: Normally 0 dB  
Set to a more suitable gain level if it is  
too dark.  
When the GAIN and WHITE BAL switch settings  
are changed, messages advising the user of the  
set positions appear on the setting change  
message display of the viewfinder screen.  
(However, this happens only when “3” has been  
set as the display mode.)  
<Notes>  
OABB must be performed when the MASTER GAIN  
levels have been changed on the LOW SETTING,  
MID SETTING and HIGH SETTING screens of the  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1, when the super gain  
setting has been changed using the USER button,  
and when the GAMMA (ON/OFF) has been  
switched on the CAMERA SETTING screen.  
OWith artificial lighting—particularly fluorescent lights  
and mercury lamps—the luminance may appear to  
be constant but the intensity of the R, G and B  
colours will change in synchronization with the  
power line frequency. Especially in regions with a  
50 Hz power line frequency, mutual interference  
arises between the vertical sync frequency (approx.  
60 Hz) of this unit and lighting frequency (50 Hz).  
As a result, the hue tends to change with the  
passage of time or flickering occurs, making it  
impossible to achieve a proper white balance.  
It is recommended that the white balance be  
achieved using the settings shown in the table  
below.  
Select the FILTER control setting in accordance  
with the lighting conditions.  
OFor examples of the FILTER control settings,  
refer to the description of the FILTER control  
(page 15) in the “Shooting (recording)/playback  
function section.”  
2
When the FILTER control setting is changed, a  
message advising the user of the set positions  
appears on the setting change message display  
of the viewfinder screen.  
(However, this  
happens only when “3” has been set as the  
display mode.)  
Power line frequency  
Shutter speed  
1/100  
50 Hz  
60 Hz  
OFF  
53 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the white balance and black balance  
Adjusting the white balance  
Erect a white pattern at a place with the same  
conditions as the source of light illuminating the  
subject, zoom in, and shoot the white of the pattern  
on the screen.  
A white object (such as a white cloth or white wall)  
near the subject may be used as a substitute for  
the white pattern.  
While the adjustment is in progress, the following  
3
6
7
message appears on the viewfinder screen (but  
only when “2” or “3” has been set as the display  
mode).  
AWBACTIVE  
The size of the white object required is shown in  
the figure below.  
Message appearing while the adjustment is in  
progress  
At least one-fourth of  
the screen width  
Adjustment is completed in several seconds. (A  
message similar to the one shown in the figure  
now appears.)  
The adjustment value is automatically saved in the  
memory (A or B) which was set in step 1.  
At least one-fourth of  
the screen height  
AWBAOK3.2K  
Message appearing upon completion of the  
adjustment  
<Notes>  
OTake care to keep high-brightness spots off the screen.  
OShoot white objects in the centre of the screen.  
A message such as the following appears if the  
colour temperature of the subject is lower than  
2300 K or higher than 5600 K.  
The downward pointing arrow indicates that the  
colour temperature is lower than the display  
temperature; conversely, the upward pointing  
arrow indicates that the it is higher than the display  
temperature.  
8
Adjust the lens aperture.  
4
5
Set the AUTO W/B BAL switch to AWB, and then  
release it.  
The switch returns to the centre, and the white  
balance is automatically adjusted.  
AWBAOK2.3K  
m
When the colour temperature is lower than 2300 K  
m
AWBAOK5.6K  
When the colour temperature is higher than 5600 K  
<Note>  
When a zoom lens with an automatic aperture  
function is used, aperture hunting may occur. Adjust  
the aperture’s gain control (marked as IG, IS, S, etc.)  
provided with the lens.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions which  
accompany the lens.  
AUTO W/B BAL switch  
<Note>  
When the AUTO W/B BAL switch is pressed again to  
the AWB side when the white balance is being  
adjusted automatically (AWB ACTIVE), the  
adjustment operation will stop.  
Hunting:  
The auto iris response is repeated, causing the brightness levels  
of the image to become inconsistent.  
The adjusted value in this case is the value before  
automatic adjustment was performed.  
54 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the white balance and black balance  
Adjusting the white balance  
When the white balance cannot  
automatically be adjusted  
When there is no time to adjust the white  
balance  
An error message appears on the viewfinder screen  
(when “2” or “3” has been set as the display mode).  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. The white  
balance for the filter is achieved in accordance with  
the setting position of the FILTER control (outer).  
Messages relating to white balance adjustment  
White balance memories  
Error  
message  
Meaning  
Recommended action  
Select a suitable filter.  
Select a suitable filter.  
There are two sets of white balance memories, A and  
B.  
COLOR TEMP. Colour temperature is  
HIGH too high.  
When the FILTER INH setting on the CAMERA SW  
MODE screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 is ON  
(default setting), the number of memories for set A  
and set B is limited to one each. In this case, the  
memory contents are not coupled with the filter.  
When FILTER INH is set to OFF, the adjustment  
values for each filter can be automatically saved in the  
memories corresponding to the WHITE BAL switch  
settings (A or B). This unit contains four filters so that  
a total of 8 (4a2) adjustment values are saved.  
COLOR TEMP. Colour temperature is  
LOW  
too low.  
LOW LIGHT  
There is not enough  
light.  
Increase the amount of  
light or increase the  
gain.  
LEVEL OVER There is too much light. Reduce the amount of  
light or reduce the gain.  
UNSTABLE  
CONDITION  
The shooting conditions If flickering is to blame,  
are unstable (shooting install the shutter, and  
under fluorescent light, stabilize the shooting  
unstable camera  
posture, etc.).  
conditions.  
CHECK  
FILTER  
The setting position of  
the filter selector control control.  
is not correct.  
Check the filter selector  
White balance search area  
It is possible to set the white balance search area to  
either 90%, 50% or 25% by changing the AWB AREA  
setting on the OPTION screen of the FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 4.  
When any of the error messages listed above is  
displayed, take the recommended action, and try  
adjusting the white balance again.  
If the error message persists even after repeated  
attempts, consult your dealer.  
<Notes>  
On rare occasions, AWB cannot be adjusted and a  
NG display appears. In a case like this, adjust AWB  
again.  
90%  
50%  
25%  
When using the unit in film mode  
When there is a large difference between the CC filter  
setting and the colour temperature of the subject, the  
dynamic range of the video signals may not be utilized  
to full potential.  
We recommend that the CC filter setting selected is  
one that is close to the colour temperature of the  
subject.  
55 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the white balance and black balance  
Adjusting the white balance  
When FILTER INH is set to ON  
When AWB is adjusted, the colour temperature and  
filter number applying at the time are displayed.  
If the filter is then turned, the colour temperature and  
filter number are displayed.  
The white balance is almost fully adjusted if the  
subject is illuminated at a colour temperature  
approaching the one displayed.  
(Example of display)  
AWBAOK3.2K  
AWB is adjusted using subject filter (B) with a  
lighting colour temperature of 3200 K.  
7
The filter is changed to filter (C)  
7
CC:C  
4.3K  
“4.3 K” is displayed.  
(1): This indicates that AWB was adjusted using  
the filter.  
7
If the colour temperature of the subject in this state  
is near 4.3 K, the white balance is right and so the  
camera can be used.  
7
The filter (B) is restored.  
7
3.2K  
“3.2 K” is displayed, and the status when AWB was  
first adjusted is indicated.  
56 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the white balance and black balance  
Adjusting the black balance  
The black balance needs to be adjusted in the  
following cases:  
While the adjustment is in progress, the following  
3
message appears on the viewfinder screen (but  
only when “2” or “3” has been set as the display  
mode).  
OWhen the unit is used for the first time  
OWhen the unit is used after it has not been used for  
a prolonged period of time  
OWhen the unit is used in an ambient temperature  
which has fluctuated significantly  
OWhen the value selected for the gain switch has  
been changed  
OWhen the super gain setting has been performed  
using the USER button  
<Note>  
While the adjustment is in progress, the lens  
aperture is automatically set to CLOSE.  
ABBACTIVE  
Message appearing while the adjustment is in  
progress  
OWhen the gamma ON/OFF setting has been  
changed  
OWhen the frame rate setting has been changed  
Adjustment is completed in several seconds. (A  
message similar to the one shown in the figure  
now appears.)  
The adjustment value is automatically saved in the  
memory.  
4
Set the switches as shown in the figure.  
1
ABBOK  
Message appearing upon completion of the  
adjustment  
<Notes>  
OCheck that the lens connector has been connected  
and that the lens aperture is set to CLOSE.  
OWhile the black balance is being adjusted, the  
aperture is automatically set to the light-shielding  
status.  
OUTPUT: CAM  
OWhile the black balance is being adjusted, the gain  
selector circuit is switched automatically.  
Flicker or noise may appear on the viewfinder  
screen, but this is not indicative of malfunctioning.  
OIf black shading is not satisfactory even with ABB  
OK, open the BLACK SHADING screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4, and adjust the black  
shading. (Refer to page 110.)  
Set the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the ABB position,  
and then release it.  
The switch returns to the centre, and the  
adjustment is performed.  
2
OWhen the super gain has been set to ON, the black  
balance is executed at the preset position in the  
white balance memory.  
OWhen the AUTO W/B BAL switch is pressed again  
to the ABB side when the black balance is being  
adjusted automatically (ABB ACTIVE), the  
adjustment operation will stop.  
The adjusted value in this case is the value before  
automatic adjustment was performed.  
AUTO W/B switch  
57 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the electronic shutter  
Shutter modes  
Registering the shutter speed  
Available shutter modes and shutter speeds  
The shutter speed is registered in the “SHUTTER  
SELECT” screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2.  
Mode  
Fixed  
Shutter speed  
Application  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “SHUTTER SELECT” screen.  
1
POSITION 1 to 6  
For shooting fast-moving  
subjects clearly  
<SHUTTERSELECT>  
n
SYNCHROSCAN2  
POSITION1  
POSITION2  
POSITION3  
POSITION4  
POSITION5  
POSITION6  
:180deg  
:1/100  
:1/120  
:1/250  
:1/500  
:1/1000  
:1/2000  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN  
Aperture angle: 3 to For shooting in such a way  
350 degrees that the horizontal striping is  
(0.8% to 97.2% of the minimized on the monitor  
frame rate) screen  
<Notes>  
ONo matter in which mode the electronic shutter is  
used, the higher the shutter speed, the lower the  
camera’s sensitivity.  
OWhen the aperture is in the automatic mode, it will  
increasingly open and the depth of focus will  
become shallower as the shutter speed is  
increased.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the desired item.  
2
3
Press the JOG dial button to set the shutter speed  
to be changed.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select ON or OFF, and  
press the button to enter the setting.  
It is possible to set a fixed speed within the range  
of 90.0 to 225.0 degrees (in units of 0.5 deg.) in  
SYNCHRO SCAN 2.  
It is also possible to set 6 different shutter speeds  
in POSITION 1 to 6, respectively.  
1/100 , 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 and 1/2000 sec.  
(or 180.0, 172.8, 144.0, 120.0, 90.0 and 45.0 deg)  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
58 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the electronic shutter  
Setting the shutter mode and  
speed  
Changing the shutter speed  
and mode selection range  
OThe SHUTTER switch is used to set the shutter  
speed and the shutter speed in the fixed mode.  
OThe shutter speed in the SYNCHRO SCAN mode  
can easily be changed using the SYNCHRO (“+”  
and “–”) buttons.  
On the SHUTTER SPEED screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2, the setting range of the shutter speed  
can be restricted to the required range and whether or  
not to use the special operation mode (SYNCHRO  
SCAN) can be selected.  
OOn the SHUTTER SPEED screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2, the setting range of the shutter  
speed can be restricted to the required range and  
whether or not to use the special operation mode  
(SYNCHRO SCAN) can be selected.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “SHUTTER SPEED” screen.  
1
<SHUTTERSPEED>  
n
SYNCHROSCAN1  
SYNCHROSCAN2  
POSITION1  
POSITION2  
POSITION3  
POSITION4  
POSITION5  
POSITION6  
:ON  
:OFF  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
Following the steps for “Switching the display  
1
mode” (page 49), set DISP MODE to “2” or “3” on  
the VF DISPLAY screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN  
MENU 2.  
Press the SHUTTER switch from ON to SEL.  
2
The current shutter setting appears on the setting  
change message display area of the viewfinder  
screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the desired item.  
2
3
Example: “1/120,” “50.0%,” etc.  
Press the JOG dial button to set the item to be  
changed.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select ON or OFF, and  
press the button to enter the setting.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
<Notes>  
SHUTTER switch  
OWhen operating the unit from the AJ-EC3 extension  
control unit (optional accessory), the shutter speed  
selected by the AJ-EC3 switch will take precedence  
in determining the actual shutter speed even when  
operations have been performed on the unit’s  
SHUTTER SPEED screen.  
OFor details on selecting the engineer mode and  
display screens, refer to “Menu operations” (pages  
86 to 88).  
Press the SHUTTER switch to the SEL position  
again, and repeat this until the desired mode or  
speed is displayed.  
When all the modes and speeds are displayed, the  
display will change in the sequence shown below.  
When the required shutter speed and mode have  
been assigned beforehand, only the assigned  
speed or mode will be displayed.  
3
Fixed mode  
POSITION1  
POSITION2  
POSITION3  
POSITION4  
POSITION5  
POSITION6  
SYNCHRO SCAN 2  
SYNCHRO SCAN 1  
59 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the electronic shutter  
Setting the synchro scan mode Switching the shutter speed  
display  
Press the SHUTTER switch from ON to SEL and  
set to SYNCHRO SCAN.  
1
The unit enables the SYNCHRO SCAN mode to be  
displayed on the viewfinder screen to be switched to  
“1/¢¢¢ (sec.),” “¢¢¢%” or “¢¢¢d (angle)” on the  
VF DISPLAY screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and open the VF DISPLAY screen.  
1
<VFDISPLAY>  
n
DISPCONDITION  
DISPMODE  
VFOUT  
:NORMAL  
:3  
:Y  
VFDTL  
:4  
ZEBRA1DETECT  
ZEBRA2DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
:070%  
:085%  
:SPOT  
:45%  
LOWLIGHTLVL  
SYNCHROSCANDISP.:deg  
ECUMENUDISP. :ON  
SHUTTER switch  
In the SYNCHRO SCAN mode, continuous  
switching inside the 3.0 deg to 350.0 deg (0.8% to  
97.2%) range can be achieved by pressing the  
SYNCHRO (“+” and “–”) buttons.  
2
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SYNCHRO SCAN DISP. item.  
2
<VFDISPLAY>  
DISPCONDITION  
DISPMODE  
VFOUT  
:NORMAL  
:3  
:Y  
VFDTL  
:4  
ZEBRA1DETECT  
ZEBRA2DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
:070%  
:085%  
:SPOT  
:45%  
LOWLIGHTLVL  
SYNCHROSCANDISP.:deg  
n
ECUMENUDISP.  
:ON  
Press the JOG dial button to set the SYNCHRO  
SCAN display mode.  
Turn the JOG dial button, select the display, and  
then press the JOG dial button to enter the  
selection.  
3
4
sec (seconds): 1/¢¢¢  
%
: ¢¢¢%  
deg (angle) : ¢¢¢d  
e.g.  
When the frame rate is set to 24 fps and exposure  
time is set to half:  
1/48 sec = 50% = 180 deg.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
60 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Film tone gamma function  
The unit incorporates a total of three gamma curves—  
two cine curves (for films/for videos) and the  
conventional video gamma curve—and it enables the  
curve that best suits the application at hand to be  
selected.  
Film mode (FILM MENU)  
Two types of film-like images can be achieved in this  
mode.  
FILM REC (for films: film gamma)  
This is the optimum mode for printing the images  
recorded on tape onto film and presenting them.  
The images are processed using the film-use cine  
gamma characteristics developed by Panasonic.  
VIDEO REC (for videos: film tone gamma)  
Even when playing back images recorded on tape  
using a video component, this mode provides a  
wide dynamic range, enabling images to be played  
back in a mode where the images are more like film  
images than the conventional video images.  
The images are processed using the video-use cine  
gamma characteristics developed by Panasonic.  
Switching from the film mode to video mode or vice  
versa can be accomplished using the CAM MENU  
SEL item on the OPTION screen of FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 4.  
Two gamma curves (for films/for videos) are available  
in the film mode. They can be set by selecting the  
CINE GAMMA SEL item on the GAMMA screen of  
FILM MAIN MENU 1.  
Video mode (VIDEO MENU)  
This is the optimum mode for playing back the images  
recorded on tape using a video component. The  
images are processed using the conventional video  
gamma characteristics.  
The menu settings performed in the film mode and  
video mode are saved separately.  
Switching the frame frequency  
This unit allows the frame frequency to be switched to  
60.00 Hz or 59.94 Hz to provide support in areas with  
different video systems. The frame frequency can be  
switched on the OPTION screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN  
MENU 4.  
Press the JOG dial button to set the item to be  
used.  
Turn it to select the frequency, and then press it to  
enter the selection.  
3
At this time, the  
message  
TURN OFF POWER  
flashes on the display.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and open the OPTION screen.  
1
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
<OPTION>  
n
ENGSECURITY  
SHD,ABBSWCTRL:ON  
AWBAREA :50%  
AWB&ABBOFFSET:OFF  
CAMMENUSEL  
SYSTEMFREQ.  
:OFF  
:FILMMENU  
:60.00Hz  
Set the POWER switch to OFF to turn off the  
power.  
The frame frequency will be switched when it is  
turned back on.  
5
Press the MODE CHECK button to check that the  
frame frequency has been switched.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SYSTEM FREQ item.  
2
61 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Variable frame rate  
This camera/VTR enables the frame rate (shooting  
speed) to be set from 4 fps to 60 fps.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
Since the 720P/59.94 Hz or 720P/60.00 Hz format is  
used for recording onto the tape or outputting to the  
HD SDI OUT connector, users now have the exciting  
opportunity to create a whole new dimension of  
moving images with clearer slow-motion images and  
blur effects—a world which was hitherto confined to  
the field of film production—in their own video  
productions.  
Using the synchro scan adjustment switches  
(“+” and “–”)  
Set the unit to a status other than the menu  
operation status.  
This unit automatically stores as the tape  
management information both the frame rate  
information which indicates the shooting speed and  
the active frame information which indicates the first  
frame where the frame image was switched in the  
user’s bit of the sub-code track area (this used to be  
the LTC area). This information is output from the TC  
OUT connector and HD SDI OUT connector. Further,  
the active frame information is stored in the least  
significant digit of the user’s bit while the frame rate  
information is stored in its lower third and fourth digits.  
1
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the frame  
rate information display at the top left of the  
viewfinder screen starts flashing.  
2
24 1/250 S  
EX2  
10min 14.6V  
/46 BP402  
Setting the frame rate  
There are two ways in which the frame rate can be  
set.  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
!D.L.  
iREC  
1B A 12dB  
F5.6 Z99  
Using menu operations  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “FRAME MODE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 2.  
1
Press the synchro scan adjustment switches (“+”  
and “–”) to set the desired frame rate.  
<Note>  
After about 5 seconds, the frame rate information  
display stops flashing and lights. Press the  
synchro scan adjustment switches (“+” and “–”)  
while this display is flashing.  
3
4
<FRAMEMODE>  
n
FRAMERATERANGE:60-12  
FRAMERATE  
SCANREVERSE  
:24  
:OFF  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the frame rate.  
Refrain from further operation, and in about 5  
seconds the frame rate information display on the  
viewfinder screen will stop flashing, and the frame  
rate will be set.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “FRAME RATE” item.  
2
3
<Note>  
When the frame rate has been changed, adjust the  
black balance once again.  
Press the JOG dial button, and set the desired  
frame rate.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select the frame rate,  
and press the JOG dial button to enter the  
selection.  
62 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Variable frame rate  
<Notes>  
In this unit, the frame rate is set by changing the  
storage time of the optical signals sensed by the CCD.  
Depending on the frame rate setting, the following  
problems may arise.  
1White streaks  
The dark current of the photodiode that configures  
the CCD’s pixels causes defective pixels to arise,  
and this results in the appearance of white streaks  
on the screen. This current increases in direct  
proportion to the rise in the CCD’s temperature and  
storage time in the photodiode.  
In short, the white streaks increase in inverse  
proportion to the frame rate setting.  
When a lower frame rate setting is desired, reduce  
the master gain setting and, where possible, avoid  
direct sunlight and use the unit in a cool  
environment.  
2Delayed response time in automatic processing  
When the frame rate setting has been lowered, it  
takes longer for the unit to perform the automatic  
processing (such as auto white balance, flare  
compensation, auto knee and auto iris), possibly  
giving the user the impression that something is  
odd or wrong.  
The response time for automatic processes is  
particularly slow at a frame rate of 20 fps and  
below.  
When the frame rate has been set to 20 fps or  
below, it is recommended that the unit be operated  
with the automatic processing released.  
3Disturbed images  
The images may be disturbed for a moment if  
scene-to-scene continuity is performed while the  
time code is allowed to advance in the rec run  
mode when the frame rate is set to 24 fps or 30 fps.  
This occurs in order to reset the video signals from  
the camera so as to maintain the continuity of the  
time code recorded on the tape.  
The disturbed images are not recorded on the tape  
but they will affect the signals which are output from  
the HD SDI OUT connector.  
Furthermore, if the time code is allowed to advance  
in the free run mode when the frame rate is set to  
24 fps or 30 fps, at that instant when the time code  
is preset or the time code is locked to the external  
signal, the images may be disturbed for a moment.  
63 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scan reverse  
Using an HD lens adapter made by Angenieux, this  
unit supports the ultra-prime lenses used for film  
cameras as a standard feature. Furthermore, it can  
also select the setting of the scan reverse function for  
canceling the image correction (reversal of the  
top/bottom and left/right of the images) that is  
performed when this adapter is used.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “SCAN REVERSE” item.  
2
3
Press the JOG dial button, and set the desired  
scan reverse.  
Turn the JOG dial button, ON or OFF and press  
the JOG dial button to enter the selection.  
Setting the scan reverse  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
1
and display the “FRAME MODE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 2.  
<FRAMEMODE>  
n
FRAMERATERANGE:60-12  
FRAMERATE  
SCANREVERSE  
:24  
:OFF  
Adjusting the audio level  
When the AUTO SELECT CH1 and CH2 selector  
switches are set to AUTO, the audio CH1 and CH2  
input levels are adjusted automatically.  
Proceed as follows to adjust the audio channel 1 and  
2 levels manually.  
AUDIO LEVEL  
CH1 control  
AUDIO LEVEL  
CH2 control  
Manual audio level adjustments  
AUTO SELECT CH1  
selector switch  
Set the AUTO SELECT CH1 and CH2 selector  
switches to MAN.  
1
AUTO SELECT CH2  
selector switch  
Adjust the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls in  
2
such a way that, when audio signals are input, the  
level meter reading will not exceed 0 dBu even  
under maximum signal input level conditions.  
Limiter  
When the audio levels have been adjusted manually,  
the limiter circuit is tripped by an excessively high  
input level. This circuit can be turned ON or OFF on  
the MIC/AUDIO screen of the VTR menu.  
(The factory setting is OFF.)  
64 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the time data  
When the user’s bit and time code are both to be  
used, the user’s bit is set first.  
If the time code is set first, the time code generator  
will stop while the user’s bit is being set so that the  
time code setting will be off.  
User’s bit memory function  
The user’s bit settings (except for the actual time) are  
automatically saved in the memory and retained even  
after the power is turned off.  
The time code setting range extends from 00:00:00:00  
to 23:59:59:29.  
<Notes>  
OIn the camera image recording mode, the tape  
management information shown on page 68 is  
output.  
OWhen DATE is selected from the UB MODE items,  
the real time operations for year/month/day of the  
TIME/DATE screen are adhered to.  
OWhen TIME is selected from the UB MODE items,  
the real time operations for hours/minutes/seconds  
of the TIME/DATE screen are adhered to.  
OThe user’s bit setting contents are output to the six  
higher digits of the user’s bit in the VIDEO AUX  
area (which used to be the VITC area). In the  
internal colour bar signal recording mode, they are  
also output to the six higher digits of the LTC user’s  
bit.  
OThe user’s bit cannot be set since the active frame  
information and other tape management  
information is always output to the two lower digits  
of the user’s bit.  
Setting the user’s bit  
In the internal colour bar signal recording mode,  
memos (dates and times) of up to eight hexadecimal  
digits can be recorded on the sub-code track by  
setting the user’s bit.  
Set the OUTPUT (output signal selector)/AUTO  
KNEE switch to BARS.  
1
Set the DISPLAY switch to UB.  
2
Set the TCG switch to SET.  
3
Set the user’s bit using the SHIFT button, “+”  
button and “–” button.  
SHIFT button:  
4
This is used to start the digit to be set flashing.  
Each time it is pressed, the flashing moves by  
one digit to the right.  
2
“+” button:  
This increments by 1 the numerical value of the  
flashing digit.  
“–” button:  
3,5  
This decrements by 1 the numerical value of the  
flashing digit.  
A to F in hexadecimal notation are displayed as follows:  
Hexadecimal  
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
notation  
Display  
1
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN or R-RUN.  
5
6
Select UB MODE item on the TC/UB screen of  
VTR MENU.  
65 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the time data  
Setting the time code  
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
1
Set the TCG switch to SET.  
2
1
Switch the TC MODE to DF or NDF on the TC/UB  
screen of VTR MENU.  
Select DF to run the time code in the drop frame  
mode or select NDF to run the time code in the  
non-drop frame mode.  
3
2,5  
Set the time code using the SHIFT button, “+”  
button and “–” button.  
SHIFT button:  
4
4
This is used to start the digit to be set flashing.  
Each time it is pressed, the flashing moves by  
one digit to the right.  
“+” button:  
This increments by 1 the numerical value of the  
flashing digit.  
“–” button:  
This decrements by 1 the numerical value of the  
flashing digit.  
Select the TCG switch position.  
5
Select F-RUN for running the time code in the free-  
run mode or select R-RUN for running it in the rec-  
run mode.  
Time code when the battery is replaced  
Set the number of frames per seconds (24, 25 or  
6
The backup function works even when the battery is  
replaced, and the time code generator continues to  
operate for a prolonged duration (approx. 1 year).  
30) displayed in the frame digits of the time code  
using the TC DISP SEL item on the TC/UB screen  
of VTR MENU.  
The time code is converted to the number of  
frames which has been set here, and displayed.  
<Note>  
When the POWER switch is set to ON 5 OFF 5  
ON, the backup accuracy of the time code is  
approximately 2 frames.  
<Notes>  
OWhen the frame rate is set to 24 fps, this unit will  
perform the processing in the non-drop frame mode  
in order to maintain the continuity of the frames  
even when the time code has been set to the drop  
frame mode.  
Furthermore, when the frame rate has been set to  
24 fps, it will not be possible to set the time code  
while recording is in progress since the images will  
be disturbed if the advancing of the time code is  
discontinuous.  
OWhen the frame frequency has been set to 60.00  
Hz, the unit always performs the processing in the  
non-drop frame mode.  
66 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the time data  
<Note>  
Externally locking the time code  
When the external lock operation is performed, the  
time code is instantly locked to the external time code,  
and the same value as the external code value  
appears on the counter display.  
Set the POWER switch to ON.  
1
Do not set the unit to the recording mode during the  
few seconds it takes for the sync generator to  
stabilize.  
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN.  
2
3
4
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
User’s bit setting when the time code is externally  
locked  
When the time code is externally locked, only the time  
data is locked to the time data of the external time  
code.  
Supply the reference time code and reference  
video signal which are in a phase relationship that  
satisfies the time code standard to the TC IN  
connector and GENLOCK IN connector  
respectively.  
This means that the user’s bit can be set separately  
for each unit.  
The user’s bit can also be locked to the user’s bit of  
the external time code. For details, consult your  
dealer.  
To release the external lock  
First stop supplying the external time code, and set  
the TCG switch to R-RUN.  
3
2
When switching the power from the battery to an  
external power supply while the time code is  
externally locked  
In order to ensure the continuity of the time code  
generator’s power, connect the external power supply  
to the DC IN connector, and then remove the battery  
pack. If the battery pack is removed first, no  
guarantees can be made for the continuity of the  
external locking of the time code.  
1
Example of connections for external  
lock  
Gen-locking of the camera unit while the time  
code is externally locked  
While the time code is externally locked, the camera  
unit is gen-locked by the reference video signal which  
is supplied to the GEN LOCK IN connector.  
The time code generator of the VTR unit can be  
locked to an external generator.  
When locking to an external signal  
<Notes>  
OWhen the frame rate is set to 24 fps, this unit will  
perform the processing in the non-drop frame mode  
in order to maintain the continuity of the frames  
even when the time code has been set to the drop  
frame mode.  
Reference  
time code  
GENLOCK IN  
TC IN  
Reference  
video signal  
Furthermore, when the frame frequency has been  
set to 60.00 Hz as well, the unit performs the  
processing in the non-drop frame mode.  
If an external time code generator is used, set it to  
the non-drop frame mode.  
The built-in time code generator is now locked to the  
reference time code.  
About 10 seconds after locking, the external lock  
status will be retained even if the connection of the  
externally supplied reference time code is  
disconnected. However, the servo lock will be subject  
to disturbances if it is connected or disconnected  
during recording (REC).  
OUse the same frame frequency setting for the  
reference time code and reference videos signal as  
the unit’s setting.  
When the frame rate is used at 24 fps, the image  
may be disturbed if the frame frequencies differ.  
67 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tape management information  
This unit automatically stores as the tape management information both the frame rate information which  
indicates the shooting speed and the active frame information which indicates the first frame where the frame  
image was switched in the user’s bit of the sub-code track area (this used to be the LTC area). This information  
is output from the TC OUT connector and HD SDI OUT connector. Further, the active frame information is  
stored in the least significant digit of the user’s bit while the frame rate information is stored in its lower third and  
fourth digits.  
Example of display  
VITC user’s bit  
LTC user’s bit  
OWhen the internal colour bar signals are being  
User’s bit setting  
recorded  
Tape management information  
LTC user’s bit verification  
information  
User’s bit setting  
0 1 : 1 2 : 0 1 : x x  
Frame frequency  
5: 59.94 Hz  
To verify the VITC user’s bit, set the DISPLAY  
switch to UB, and hold down the HOLD button.  
While the HOLD button is held down, the VITC  
user’s bit information appears on the counter  
display.  
6: 60.00 Hz  
Tape management information  
OActive frame information  
OREC START/STOP mark  
0 1 : 1 2 : 0 1 : 5 0  
OWhen the camera’s video signals are being  
recorded  
Recorded frame number count  
This indicates the number of frames  
recorded.  
When the frame rate has been set to  
24 fps and recording has been  
performed for 10 seconds, “0240”  
will be displayed as the count.  
When recording is started, the count  
is reset to “0000,” and the number of  
recorded frames per cut is counted  
up to “9999.”  
Frame rate information  
24 fps  
(23.98 fps)  
Frame frequency  
5: 59.94 Hz  
6: 60.00 Hz  
Tape management information  
OActive frame information  
OREC START/STOP mark  
0 2 : 4 0 : 2 4 : 5 0  
68 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the user data  
The contents of the setting menus can be saved in the  
user area of the camera’s memory, and they can be  
loaded from this area. Use of this data speeds up the  
process of reproducing suitable setup statuses.  
Loading the user data  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “CAM CARD READ/WRITE”  
screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3.  
1
User data operation  
Menus are used to save the setting menu contents in  
the user area of the camera’s memory and load them  
from this area.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
n
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
READUSERDATA  
Saving the user data  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “INITIALIZE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
1
<INITIALIZE>  
n
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the READ USER DATA item.  
2
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
READUSERDATA  
:1  
:1  
n
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the WRITE USER DATA item.  
2
3
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
3
4
WRITE?  
YES  
READ?  
YES  
NO  
n
NO  
n
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data settings are saved in the user area of the  
camera’s memory.  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data settings saved in the user area of the  
camera’s memory are loaded, and the settings are  
completed.  
After the data has been saved, press the MENU  
button twice.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
Press the MENU button twice.  
5
6
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
When the frame frequency setting has been  
changed, it is necessary to restart the unit by  
turning the POWER switch to OFF and then to ON  
again for the setting to be switched.  
69 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the scene file  
The contents of the setting menus can be saved in the  
scene file area of the camera’s memory, and they can  
be loaded from this area.  
Four scene files are provided in the unit.  
Use of this data speeds up the process of reproducing  
suitable setup statuses.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the TITLE1, TITLE2, TITLE3 or TITLE4  
item that corresponds to the scene file whose title  
is to be provided.  
5
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
Scene file operation  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
Menus are used to save the setting menu contents in  
the scene file area of the camera’s memory and load  
them from this area.  
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
n
Saving the scene file  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “INITIALIZE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
1
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) moves to the title input area, and the input  
mode is established.  
6
7
<INITIALIZE>  
n
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
WRITE  
RESET  
<INITIALIZE>  
:1  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
m
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SCENE SEL item.  
2
3
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed  
is switched in the following sequence:  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the scene  
file number starts flashing. Turn the JOG dial  
button to select the scene file in which data is to be  
saved.  
Space: )  
7
letters: A—Z  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
n
WRITE  
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
8
9
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the next position (right), and repeat  
steps 7 and 8 to set the characters (maximum of  
8).  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the scene file.  
4
70 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the scene file  
When the title has been input, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:”  
position.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the  
following message appears.  
10  
13  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
<INITIALIZE>  
SELECT  
WRITE  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
:1  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
:1  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE  
:
m
22222222  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
WRITE?  
YES  
NO  
n
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data settings and title are saved in the  
scene file area of the camera’s memory.  
<Note>  
The setting is not effective if the unit is  
transferred to a different menu or if the menu is  
exited without executing “WRITE.”  
14  
15  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) returns to the TITLE1, TITLE2, TITLE3  
or TITLE4 item.  
11  
12  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
22222222  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
n
After the data has been saved, press the MENU  
button twice.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the WRITE item.  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
n
22222222  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
71 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the scene file  
Loading the scene file  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
6
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
1
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
and display the “INITIALIZE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
:1  
<INITIALIZE>  
n
READUSERDATA  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
TITLE  
:
WRITE  
READ?  
YES  
RESET  
NO  
n
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data settings saved in the scene file area of  
the camera’s memory are loaded, and the settings  
are completed.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SCENE SEL item.  
2
3
Press the MENU button twice.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the scene  
file number starts flashing. Turn the JOG dial  
button to select the scene file whose data is to be  
loaded.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
n
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the scene file.  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the READ item.  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:2  
n
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
72 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the scene file  
Resetting the scene file  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
6
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “INITIALIZE” screen of FILM  
(CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
1
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
:1  
<INITIALIZE>  
n
READUSERDATA  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
TITLE  
:
:1  
RESET?  
YES  
WRITE  
RESET  
NO  
n
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data saved in the scene file area of the  
camera’s memory is reset and restored to the  
factory shipment status.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SCENE SEL item.  
2
3
Press the MENU button twice.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the scene  
file number starts flashing. Turn the JOG dial  
button to select the scene file whose data is to be  
reset.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:1  
n
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the scene file.  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the RESET item.  
<INITIALIZE>  
READFACTORYDATA  
WRITEUSERDATA  
SCENESEL  
READ  
:2  
WRITE  
RESET  
n
TITLE1:  
TITLE2:  
TITLE3:  
TITLE4:  
73 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup card operations  
Use of the setup memory card (optional accessory)  
enables the setting menu contents to be saved. Use  
of this data speeds up the process of reproducing  
suitable setup statuses.  
OThe multimedia cards or the SD memory cards can  
be used as the setup cards.  
How to eject the setup card  
Open the cover by raising its bottom edge, and eject  
the setup card.  
<Note>  
Take care not to touch the connector on the edge of  
the setup card directly.  
How to insert the setup card  
With the surface bearing the logo facing you, insert  
the setup card into the setup card slot, and close the  
cover.  
<Note>  
Check that the surface bearing the logo is facing you  
and the lettering is not upside down before inserting  
the card.  
When inserting the card, check the direction in which  
the card is pointing, and if it does not slide neatly into  
place, it means that the card may be pointing in the  
wrong direction or that it may be upside down. Do not  
force the card into place but check which is the front  
and back and which is the top and bottom, and try  
inserting the card again.  
Bear in mind the following points when using  
and saving the setup cards.  
OAvoid high temperatures and high humidity levels.  
OKeep the cards away from water.  
OAvoid exposing the cards to electrical charges.  
Keep the setup card inside the unit with the cover  
closed.  
74 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup card operations  
The operations for saving setting data on the setup  
card and loading the saved data from the card are  
performed on the CAM CARD READ/WRITE screen  
of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3.  
To proceed with the formatting of the setup card,  
turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor)  
to YES, and press the JOG dial button. When the  
formatting of the card is completed, the following  
message appears.  
4
Formatting the setup card  
<Note>  
When the card is formatted, the settings statuses  
applying at the time are also saved in the memory.  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “CAM CARD READ/WRITE”  
screen.  
1
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
SELECT  
:1  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
n
:1  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
TITLE  
:
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
CONFIGOK  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
If one of the following messages appears when the JOG dial  
button is pressed, the card will not be formatted.  
Error message  
CONFIG NG  
NO CARD  
(setup card has not been  
inserted)  
Remedial action  
Insert the card.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the CARD CONFIG item.  
2
3
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
CONFIG NG  
ERROR  
(the card cannot be formatted)  
The card may be defective.  
Replace it.  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
n
READUSERDATA  
TITLE:  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
5
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears on the screen.  
<Note>  
Data titles cannot be recognized when the setup  
card was inserted while the CAM CARD  
READ/WRITE screen was open. Move the arrow  
(cursor) to the TITLE READ item, and press the  
JOG dial button.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE  
:
The data title is recognized, and the title is  
displayed.  
CONFIG?  
YES  
NO  
n
75 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup card operations  
Saving the data settings on the  
card  
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “CAM CARD READ/WRITE”  
screen.  
Give a title to the selected file.  
1
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the “TITLE : ” item.  
4
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
n
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
READUSERDATA  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
TITLE:  
n
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Select the file No.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) moves to the title input area, and the input  
mode is established.  
5
6
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SELECT item which comes avove  
WRITE, and press the JOG dial button.  
2
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
n
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
READUSERDATA  
READUSERDATA  
m
TITLE:  
1:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
TITLE:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed  
Turn the JOG dial button to select a number from 1  
to 8, and press the JOG dial button.  
3
is switched in the following sequence:  
Space: )  
7
letters: A—Z  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the next position (right), and repeat  
steps 6 and 7 to set the characters (maximum of  
8).  
76 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup card operations  
Saving the data settings to the selected file.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the  
following message appears.  
12  
13  
When the title has been input, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:”  
position.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
9
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
TITLE  
:
WRITE?  
YES  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
NO  
n
READUSERDATA  
22222222  
:
TITLE  
m
22222222  
TITLE:  
1:  
5:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
When the data saving is completed, the  
following message appears.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) returns to the TITLE: item.  
10  
11  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
TITLE  
:
READUSERDATA  
WRITEOK  
YES  
22222222  
TITLE:  
n
NO  
n
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
22222222  
:
TITLE  
To save the VTR unit’s data, open the VTR CARD  
READ/WRITE screen, and perform steps 11 to 13.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the WRITE item.  
If one of the following messages appears when the JOG dial  
button is pressed, the data cannot be saved.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
Error message  
WRITE NG  
NO CARD  
(setup card has not been  
inserted)  
Remedial action  
Insert the card.  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
n
READUSERDATA  
22222222  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
WRITE NG  
FORMAT ERROR  
(formatting error)  
The card was formatted by a  
device other than the unit.  
Replace the card.  
WRITE NG  
ERROR  
The card may be defective.  
Replace it.  
(the data cannot be saved)  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
14  
77 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup card operations  
Load the data of the selected file.  
Loading the data saved on the  
card  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the READ item.  
4
Perform the menu operations (pages 86 to 88),  
and display the “CAM CARD READ/WRITE”  
screen.  
1
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
n
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
n
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
READUSERDATA  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
5
6
If the data is given a title when it is saved, the title  
will also be displayed.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
<Note>  
:1  
:1  
“F_” appears in front of a title which was set in  
the film mode; “V_” appears in front of a title  
which was set in the video mode. When the  
data has been loaded, the unit is set to the  
operation mode of the loaded data.  
SELECT  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE  
:
READ?  
YES  
NO  
n
Select the file No.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
When the data loading is completed, the following  
message appears.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow  
(cursor) to the SELECT item which comes avove  
READ, and press the JOG dial button.  
2
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
SELECT  
WRITE  
SELECT  
:1  
SELECT  
READ  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
n
:1  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
WRITE  
CARDCONFIG  
TITLEREAD  
TITLE  
:
READUSERDATA  
READOK  
YES  
NO  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
n
22222222  
:
TITLE  
To load the VTR unit’s data, open the VTR CARD  
READ/WRITE screen, and perform steps 4 to 6.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select any number  
from 1 to 8, and press the JOG dial button.  
3
78 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup card operations  
If one of the following messages appears when the JOG dial  
button is pressed, the data cannot be loaded.  
Error message  
READ NG  
Remedial action  
Insert the card.  
NO CARD  
(setup card has not been  
inserted)  
READ NG  
FORMAT ERROR  
(formatting error)  
The card was formatted by a  
device other than the unit.  
Replace the card.  
READ NG  
NO FILE  
Save the file data.  
(file not found)  
READ NG  
ERROR  
Data saved by devices other than  
unit cannot be loaded.  
(the data cannot be loaded)  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu  
operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays  
showing the unit’s current statuses appear at the  
top and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
7
79 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cassette tapes  
Loading a cassette tape  
Check that there are no cables around the cassette  
holder or top panel, and set the POWER switch to  
ON.  
<Note>  
Checking for tape slack  
1
Gently push in the reel using your finger and turn the  
reel in the direction of the arrow. If the reel fails to  
turn, it means there is no tape slack.  
When condensation has formed inside the unit, the  
HUMID display lights. Wait until this display is  
cleared before proceeding with the intended  
operation.  
HUMID display  
Ejecting the cassette tape  
While the power is still on, press the EJECT button to  
open the cassette holder, and take out the cassette  
tape. If another cassette is not going to be loaded  
immediately after this tape is ejected, close the  
cassette holder.  
POWER: ON  
Ejecting the cassette when the battery  
has no charge  
First, set the POWER switch to OFF to turn off the  
unit’s power.  
Press the EJECT button.  
The cassette holder opens.  
2
EJECT button  
Then turn the power back on, and immediately hold  
down the EJECT button.  
The cassette can be removed when there is still some  
power left in the battery. However, do not repeat this  
operation.  
To prevent accidental erasure  
Set the cassette’s tab to SAVE to prevent the  
recordings on the tape from being erased accidentally.  
Cassette holder  
REC  
SAVE  
Insert the cassette tape and press the part marked  
with the arrow to close the cassette holder  
securely.  
3
<Note>  
Check that there is no slack in the tape of the  
cassette.  
80 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
This section describes the basic steps for shooting  
and recording.  
Before actually departing to shoot scenes, carry out  
inspections to ensure that the system is functioning  
properly.  
OFor details on how to perform these inspections,  
refer to “Inspections prior to shooting” (pages 128  
to 131).  
From adjusting the white balance and  
black balance to stopping the recording  
Turn on the power, and after inserting the cassette,  
set the switches as shown in the figure below.  
OUTPUT:  
CAM/AUTO KNEE ON  
From providing the power supply to  
loading the cassette  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH 1/CH 2:  
AUTO  
Install a fully charged battery pack.  
1
Set the POWER switch to ON. Now check that the  
2
HUMID display is not showing and that at least 5  
segments of the remaining battery charge display  
are lit.  
OIf the HUMID display is showing, wait until it  
goes off.  
OIf at least 5 segments of the remaining battery  
charge display are not lit, replace the battery  
with a fully charged one.  
TCG:  
F-RUN or  
R-RUN  
Check that there are no cables around the cassette  
holder or top panel, and then press the EJECT  
button to open the cassette holder.  
3
GAIN:  
Aperture: Automatic  
Normally set to 0 dB; change  
to a more suitable value if the  
picture is too dark.  
After checking the following, insert the cassette  
4
tape, and close the cassette holder.  
OPosition of the accidental erasure prevent tab  
OTape slack  
3
4
2
2
1
81 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Shooting  
1-1 Select the filter to match the lighting conditions,  
Tape function buttons  
During recording, the tape function buttons (EJECT,  
REW, FF, PLAY/PAUSE and STOP) will not work.  
and set the WHITE BAL switch to “A” or “B” if  
the white balance has been stored in the  
memory ahead of time.  
If the white balance and/or black balance  
have not been stored in the memory and  
there is no time to adjust the white balance:  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. The  
white balance for the filter is achieved in  
accordance with the setting position of the  
FILTER control (outer).  
1-2 When adjusting the white balance on the  
spot  
Select the filter to match the lighting conditions,  
set the WHITE BAL switch to “A” or “B,” and  
adjust the white balance as follows:  
(1) Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the  
AWB position and adjust the white balance.  
(2) Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the  
ABB position and adjust the black balance.  
(3) Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the  
AWB position and adjust the white balance  
again.  
1-1, 1-2  
3
4, 5  
1-2  
2
For details on how to adjust the white balance,  
refer to “Adjusting the white balance and black  
balance” (pages 53 to 57).  
Point the camera at the subject, and adjust the  
focus and zoom.  
2
When the electronic shutter is to be used, set the  
3
shutter speed and operating mode.  
OFor details, refer to “Setting the electronic  
shutter” (pages 58 to 60).  
Press the VTR START button or lens VTR button  
to start recording.  
During recording, the REC lamp inside the  
viewfinder lights.  
4
To stop the recording, press the VTR START  
button again.  
The REC lamp inside the viewfinder goes off.  
5
82 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Scene-to-scene continuity  
If the unit is in the rec-pause mode, it is possible to  
ensure scene-to-scene continuity with an accuracy of  
0 up to 1 frame just by pressing the VTR START  
button or lens VTR button.  
If the unit is in a mode other than rec-pause, the point  
at which the scene-to-scene continuity is to be  
maintained must be located before recording is  
started.  
Ensuring scene-to-scene continuity at  
other times  
Proceed as follows either after the tape has been  
allowed to run or after the cassette has been ejected  
or when ensuring continuity on a tape which has been  
recorded only in part.  
While monitoring the viewfinder screen, press the  
PLAY/PAUSE button to play back the tape.  
1
During rec-pause  
The scene-to-scene continuity timing is located  
automatically. However, the time taken until the start  
of recording differs depending on the setting of the  
VTR SAVE/STBY switch.  
At the place on the tape where continuity is to be  
maintained, press the PLAY/PAUSE (or STOP)  
button again to stop the tape.  
2
OWhen the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set to SAVE,  
recording commences about two seconds after the  
VTR START button is pressed.  
OWhen the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set to STBY,  
recording commences as soon as the VTR START  
button is pressed.  
Press the lens RET button. It takes about two  
seconds to complete the preparations for the  
scene-to-scene continuity.  
3
Press the VTR START button or lens VTR button  
to start the recording.  
4
Ensuring scene-to-scene continuity after  
the power was turned off while the unit  
was in the rec-pause mode  
1,2  
3
Switch the power back on.  
1
Press the VTR START button or lens VTR button  
to start the recording.  
2
4
The functions of a VTR START/STOP button can be  
assigned to the USER1 or USER2 button on the  
unit’s side panel on the CAM SW MODE screen of  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2, and this button can  
then be used to perform the start and stop  
operations.  
2
1
83 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback (checking what has been recorded)  
When the PLAY/PAUSE button is pressed, the  
playback pictures can be monitored in black and white  
on the viewfinder screen.  
These playback pictures can be monitored in two  
other ways.  
Rec review  
Colour playback  
When recording is temporarily stopped and the lens  
RET button is pressed, the last two seconds of the  
tape are automatically rewound, and the playback  
pictures on this part of the tape appear on the  
viewfinder screen. This makes it possible to check  
whether recording was performed properly.  
After the two seconds of the tape have been played  
back, the unit is again set to the recording start  
standby mode.  
When an HD colour monitor is connected to the unit’s  
HD SDI OUT connector, colour playback pictures can  
be monitored.  
The playback signals will be output to the viewfinder  
even during rewinding (REW) or fast forwarding (FF).  
Selecting the audio output of the playback signal and  
adjusting the volume are accomplished using the  
MONITOR switch control (page 13).  
If the RET button is held down, a maximum of 10  
seconds of the tape is rewound and played back.  
<Note>  
The rec review function cannot be used unless  
recording lasts for one or more seconds.  
The functions of the RET button on the lens can be  
assigned to the USER1 or USER2 button on the  
unit’s side panel on the CAM SW MODE screen of  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2, and this button can  
then be used to perform the return operations.  
Lens RET button functions  
Depending on the internal VTR status, the RET button  
functions which appear on the viewfinder screen  
change as follows.  
The functions of the RET button on the lens can be  
assigned to the USER1 or USER2 button on the  
unit’s side panel on the CAM SW MODE screen of  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2, and this button can  
then be used to perform the return operations.  
Internal VTR  
What appears on the viewfinder screen  
status  
During recording  
Pictures which are shot by the camera  
(RET button does not work)  
During rec-  
pause  
What has just been recorded (rec review of 2  
seconds of the tape recording) can be checked.  
During playback  
Playback pictures of internal VTR  
(RET button does not work)  
During play-  
pause  
Pictures accompanying operation to locate the  
scene-to-scene continuity point  
84 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other VTR functions  
NEWS REC function  
INTERVAL REC (intermittent recording)  
function  
The NEWS REC function is set using NEWS REC  
MODE on the VTR MENU “FUNCTION” screen.  
This function makes simple interval shooting  
(intermittent recording) possible. It proves to be  
particularly effective when shooting programmes with  
a nature theme or art programmes.  
The INTERVAL REC function is set on the VTR  
MENU “FUNCTION” screen.  
By  
controlling  
the  
VTR  
START  
button  
acknowledgment time during recording (by up to 2  
seconds), the time taken for the unit to transfer from  
the recording mode to the rec-pause mode can be  
delayed.  
In other words, by controlling the VTR START button  
operation acknowledgment time, the unit can  
continuously record without the user having to  
interrupt the recording: this safeguards against the  
failure to record those precious moments—a failure  
that occurs when recording is resumed immediately  
after it was shut down temporarily.  
OINTERVAL REC MODE  
This sets the INTERVAL REC function to ON, ONE  
SHOT or OFF.  
OINTERVAL REC TIME  
This sets the recording time (1 cut) for interval  
shooting.  
OINTERVAL PAUSE TIME  
This sets the rec-pause time for interval shooting.  
RETAKE function  
Once the above items are set, the unit is set to the  
INTERVAL REC mode, and “i” starts to flash inside  
the viewfinder.  
When the VTR START button is now pressed, interval  
shooting is started, and “iREC” lights in place of “i.”  
Also, the time unit (h/min/s/frm) display on the counter  
display area starts to flash.  
When the unit is set to rec-pause mode upon  
completion of the first interval shooting, “iREC” goes  
from lit to flashing inside the viewfinder.  
The time unit display on the counter display area  
remains flashing.  
The RETAKE function is activated by selecting ON for  
RETAKE MODE on the VTR MENU “FUNCTION”  
screen.  
If the lens RET button is pressed while holding down  
the MODE CHECK button when the unit is in the rec-  
pause mode upon completion of a recording or  
subsequently in the STOP mode, the tape will be  
rewound to a point near the start point (a position  
about 10 frames ahead of the recording start point) of  
the final picture which was last recorded, and the unit  
will be set to the rec-pause mode.  
If there is enough leeway in the shooting time and a  
particular cut is clearly judged to be no good,  
recording can be started from that point so that the  
no-good cut will be deleted.  
By cutting down on the time taken for copying onto the  
work tape, for instance, this function is very effective  
in achieving economical operation.  
iREC  
RET button  
h
min  
s
frm  
MODE CHECK button  
85 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu operations  
The setting menu operations are performed using the  
MENU button and JOG dial button. The menu  
configuration is divided into the camera unit’s setting  
menus and VTR unit’s setting menus.  
It is possible to select the engineer menu which  
enables all the setting menu items to be set or,  
alternatively, the user menu which consists of  
individually tailored menus so that only those menus  
which will be used most frequently can be set.  
User menu  
The user menu was set when the unit was shipped.  
However, the user can change the configuration of the  
menus by selecting only those menus which will be  
used most frequently so that they will be tailored to  
the user’s individual needs.  
Set the user menu on the USER MENU SELECT 1, 2,  
and 3 screen of the engineer menu. The data settings  
are saved in the non-volatile memory for long-term  
storage. The menu settings performed in the film  
mode and video mode are saved separately.  
MENU button  
JOG dial button  
Engineer menu  
All the setting menu items can be set on this menu.  
The data settings are saved in the non-volatile  
memory for long-term storage.  
Display method  
OHold down the MENU button for at least 3 seconds.  
OWhen the MENU button is pressed again, the VTR  
unit’s MAIN MENU screen is displayed.  
OWhen the MENU button is pressed once more, the  
menu screen display is cleared.  
Display method  
OWhen the MENU button is pressed, the camera  
unit’s USER menu screen which was set at the time  
of shipment is displayed.  
OWhen the MENU button is pressed again, the VTR  
unit’s USER menu screen is displayed.  
OWhen the MENU button is pressed once more, the  
menu screen display is cleared.  
<Note>  
The engineer menu is displayed at all times when the  
AJ-EC3 extension control unit (optional accessory) is  
connected to the unit for operating the unit by remote  
control.  
When the power is switched on  
Status display  
Film mode and video mode  
1A B  
0dB  
CZ73  
The unit can be set to the film mode or video mode on  
the OPTION screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4.  
When VIDEO MENU is selected as the CAM MENU  
SEL setting on the OPTION screen, the FILM USER  
MENU and FILM MAIN MENU displays change to the  
CAM USER MENU and CAM MAIN MENU.  
Press the MENU  
button.  
¢¢¢¢ FILMUSERMENU¢¢¢¢  
Camera unit’s user  
menu  
The menu settings performed in the film mode and  
video mode are saved separately.  
Press the MENU  
button.  
¢¢¢¢ VTRUSERMENU¢¢¢¢  
VTR unit’s user  
menu  
Press the MENU button.  
86 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu operations  
Basic setting menu operations  
Displaying menus  
User menu:  
Engineer menu:  
Press the MENU button.  
The camera unit’s USER menu screen is  
displayed.  
Hold down the MENU button for at least 3  
seconds.  
1
1
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the next  
MAIN menu screen (of the camera unit) is  
displayed.  
2
When the MENU button is pressed again, the VTR  
unit’s USER menu screen is displayed.  
2
When the MENU button is pressed, the VTR unit’s  
MAIN MENU screen is displayed.  
3
Press the MENU  
button.  
Hold down the MENU button  
for at least 3 seconds.  
}
}
FILM (CAM)  
USER MENU  
Press the  
MENU button.  
FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 1  
Press the  
MENU button.  
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
VTR USER MENU  
VTR MAIN MENU  
}
}
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
}
FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2  
Press the  
MENU button.  
}
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
}
FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 3  
Press the  
MENU button.  
}
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
}
FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 4  
Press the  
MENU button.  
}
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
87 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu operations  
Displaying sub-menus and deciding  
on settings  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
desired item to be set, and press the JOG dial  
button.  
3
The digit whose value is to be set now flashes.  
Operations common to the user menu and  
engineer menu  
Example:  
<ROP>  
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
Turn the JOG dial button while the USER menu  
screen or MAIN menu screen is displayed.  
I
1
MASTERPED  
MASTERDTL  
MASTERGAMMA  
RGAIN  
:+000  
:+00  
n
:0.45  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
The cursor ( ) moves to the SUB menu item.  
n
GGAIN  
BGAIN  
RPEDESTAL  
GPEDESTAL  
BPEDESTAL  
Example:  
2222  
2222  
FILMMAINMENU1  
Turn the JOG  
dial button.  
n
I
ROP  
MATRIX  
COLORCORRECTION1  
COLORCORRECTION2  
LOWSETTING  
MIDSETTING  
HIGHSETTING  
ADITIONALDTL1  
ADITIONALDTL2  
SKINTONEDTL  
KNEE/LEVEL  
Turn the JOG dial button to change the setting.  
4
5
When the desired setting is reached, press the  
JOG dial button.  
The setting is now entered.  
GAMMA  
CAMERASETTING  
Move the cursor ( ) to the desired SUB menu  
2
n
When other items are to be set, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the cursor, and change and enter  
the settings by repeating steps 3 to 5.  
6
7
item, and press the JOG dial button.  
The SUB menu is now displayed.  
(The cursor appears in the title part of the SUB  
menu.)  
To move to another SUB menu, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the cursor to the title part of the  
SUB menu, and press the JOG dial button.  
The USER menu screen or MAIN menu screen is  
now displayed so proceed with operation by  
following the same steps.  
Example:  
2222  
2222  
FILMMAINMENU1  
n
n
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
I
ROP  
MATRIX  
COLORCORRECTION1  
COLORCORRECTION2  
LOWSETTING  
MIDSETTING  
HIGHSETTING  
ADITIONALDTL1  
ADITIONALDTL2  
SKINTONEDTL  
KNEE/LEVEL  
Example:  
<ROP>  
Press the JOG  
dial button.  
n
I
MASTERPED  
MASTERDTL  
MASTERGAMMA  
RGAIN  
:+008  
:+00  
GAMMA  
CAMERASETTING  
:0.45  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
GGAIN  
BGAIN  
RPEDESTAL  
GPEDESTAL  
BPEDESTAL  
<ROP>  
n
MASTERPED  
MASTERDTL  
MASTERGAMMA  
RGAIN  
GGAIN  
BGAIN  
RPEDESTAL  
GPEDESTAL  
BPEDESTAL  
:+000  
:+00  
:0.45  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
Upon completion of the settings, press the MENU  
button. The settings are now recorded, the setting  
menu mode is exited, and the normal operation  
mode is restored.  
8
<Note>  
To exit the camera unit’s menu, press the MENU  
button twice. When the MENU button is pressed  
once, operation is transferred to the VTR unit’s  
menu.  
88 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu configuration  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1  
ROP  
MASTER PED  
MASTER DTL  
MASTER GAMMA  
R GAIN  
MATRIX  
} MATRIX TABLE  
MATRIX R-G  
MATRIX R-B  
MATRIX G-R  
MATRIX G-B  
MATRIX B-R  
MATRIX B-G  
G GAIN  
B GAIN  
R PEDESTAL  
G PEDESTAL  
B PEDESTAL  
COLOR CORRECTION 1  
COLOR CORRECTION 2  
R
(SAT)/(PHASE)  
Mg (SAT)/(PHASE)  
(SAT)/(PHASE)  
Cy (SAT)/(PHASE)  
R-Mg (SAT)/(PHASE)  
Mg-B (SAT)/(PHASE)  
B-Cy (SAT)/(PHASE)  
Cy-G (SAT)/(PHASE)  
G-Yl (SAT)/(PHASE)  
Yl-R (SAT)/(PHASE)  
B
G
(SAT)/(PHASE)  
Yl (SAT)/(PHASE)  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
} MASTER GAIN  
H. DTL LEVEL  
} MASTER GAIN  
H. DTL LEVEL  
V. DTL LEVEL  
DTL CORING  
H. DTL FREQ  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
MASTER GAMMA  
BLACK STRETCH  
} MATRIX TABLE  
} COLOR CORRECT  
V. DTL LEVEL  
DTL CORING  
H. DTL FREQ  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
MASTER GAMMA  
BLACK STRETCH  
} MATRIX TABLE  
} COLOR CORRECT  
} MASTER GAIN  
H. DTL LEVEL  
HIGH SETTING  
KNEE APERTURE  
SLIM DTL  
V. DTL LEVEL  
} ADDITIONAL DTL1  
DTL CORING  
H. DTL FREQ  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
MASTER GAMMA  
BLACK STRETCH  
} MATRIX TABLE  
} COLOR CORRECT  
ADDITIONAL DTL2  
SKIN TONE DTL  
KNEE APE LVL  
DTL GAIN (+)  
DTL GAIN (–)  
DTL CLIP  
DTL SOURCE  
V DTL FREQ.  
} SKIN TONE DTL  
} SKIN TONE ZEBRA  
SKIN DTL CORING  
Y MAX  
Y MIN  
I CENTER  
I WIDTH  
Q WIDTH  
Q PHASE  
KNEE/LEVEL  
GAMMA  
MASTER PED  
} MANUAL KNEE  
KNEE POINT  
MASTER GAMMA (FILM MENU)  
R GAMMA  
B GAMMA  
KNEE SLOPE  
} WHITE CLIP  
CINE GAMMA SEL (FILM MENU)  
BLACK STR. LVL (FILM MENU)  
DYNAMIC LVL (FILM MENU)  
WHITE CLIP LVL  
A. KNEE POINT  
A. KNEE LVL  
A. KNEE RESPONSE  
} CAMERA SETTING  
DETAIL  
HIGH COLOR  
GAMMA  
TEST SAW  
FLARE  
H-F COMPE  
LIGHTING (FILM MENU)  
D5600K (CAM MENU)  
<Note>  
Items indicated with } are items whose settings can only be switched ON and OFF.  
89 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu configuration  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3  
VF DIAPLSY  
DISP CONDITION  
DISP MODE  
CAM CARD READ/WRITE  
SELECT  
READ  
VF OUT  
SELECT  
WRITE  
VF DTL  
ZEBRA1 DETECT  
ZEBRA2 DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
LOW LIGHT LVL  
SYNCHRO SCAN DISP.  
ECU MENU DISP.  
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
READ USER DATA  
TITLE 1:  
TITLE 2:  
TITLE 3:  
TITLE 4:  
VF MARKER  
SAFETY ZONE  
CENTER MARK  
FRAME SIG  
MARK  
TITLE 5:  
TITLE 6:  
TITLE 7:  
TITLE 8:  
LVL  
CAM CARD R/W SELECT  
GENLOCK/IRIS  
ID READ/WRITE  
VF INDICATOR  
EXTENDER  
SHUTTER  
FILTER  
CAM MAIN MENU1 LEVEL R/W  
CAM MAIN MENU1 SW (}) R/W  
CAM MAIN MENU2 R/W  
CAM MAIN MENU3 R/W  
CAM MAIN MENU4 R/W  
WHITE  
GAIN  
IRIS  
CAMERA ID  
ZOOM LVL  
COLOR TEMP  
FRAME RATE  
VERSION ID (FILM MENU)  
H PHASE COARSE  
H PHASE FINE  
A. IRIS LEVEL  
A. IRIS PEAK/AVE  
A. IRIS MODE  
S. IRIS LEVEL  
IRIS GAIN  
CAMERA ID  
ID 1: 2222222222  
ID 2: 2222222222  
ID 3: 2222222222  
IRIS GAIN VALUE  
LENS ADJ  
F2.8 ADJ  
F16 ADJ  
SHUTTER SPEED  
SYNCHRO SCAN 1  
SYNCHRO SCAN 2  
POSITION 1  
POSITION 2  
POSITION 3  
POSITION 4  
POSITION 5  
POSITION 6  
SHUTTER SELECT  
SYNCHRO SCAN 2  
POSITION 1 SEL  
POSITION 2 SEL  
POSITION 3 SEL  
POSITION 4 SEL  
POSITION 5 SEL  
POSITION 6 SEL  
! LED  
GAIN (0dB)  
GAIN (–3dB)  
SHUTTER  
WHITE PRESET  
EXTENDER  
FILTER  
BLACK STR  
DAY LIGHT (FILM MENU)  
D5600K (CAM MENU)  
MATRIX  
COLOR CORRECTION  
FRAME RATE  
FILTER INH  
CAMERA SW MODE  
SHOCKLESS AWB  
COLOR BARS  
S. GAIN OFF  
USER1 SW  
USER2 SW  
S. BLK LVL  
ECU DATA SAVE  
AUTO KNEE SW  
S. GAIN VALUE  
SUPER GAIN  
FRAME MODE  
FRAME RATE RANGE  
FRAME RATE  
SCAN REVERSE  
90 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu configuration  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT1  
ROP  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
HIGH SETTING  
ADDITIONAL DTL1  
ADDITIONAL DTL2  
SKIN TONE DTL  
KNEE/LEVEL  
GAMMA  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT2  
VF DISPLAY  
VF MARKER  
VF INDICATOR  
!LED  
CAMERA SW MODE  
SUPER GAIN  
FRAME MODE  
CAMERA SETTING  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT3  
BLACK SHADING  
CAM CARD READ/WRITE  
CAM CARD R/W SELECT  
GENLOCK/IRIS  
DETECTION  
CORRECT (DIG)  
WHITE SHADING  
FLARE  
SELECT  
READ  
R FLARE  
G FLARE  
B FLARE  
DETECTION (V SAW)  
CORRECT  
TITLE  
COLORIMETRY  
INITIALIZE  
MATRIX  
READ FACTORY DATA  
WRITE USER DATA  
SCENE SEL  
READ  
WRITE  
RESET  
S/N  
S/N  
DETAIL  
TITLE 1  
TITLE 2  
H-F COMPE.  
GAMMA  
MATRIX  
FLARE  
TITLE 3  
TITLE 4  
CAMSOFT (IN)  
CAMSOFT (OUT)  
CAM TABLE  
PLD (CAM)  
M. PED  
DIAGNOSTIC  
MODULATION  
RESOLUTION  
SENSITIVITY  
MODULATION  
DETAIL  
H-F COMPE.  
GAMMA  
PLD (SHD)  
MATRIX  
EVALUATION  
OPTION  
FLARE  
ENG SECURITY  
SHD, ABB SW CTRL  
AWB AREA  
AWB & ABB OFFSET  
CAM MENU SEL  
SYSTEM FREQ  
M. PED  
RESOLUTION  
DETAIL  
H-F COMPE.  
GAMMA  
MATRIX  
FLARE  
M. PED  
SENSITIVITY  
KNEE  
W. CLIP  
M. PED  
91 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu configuration  
VTR MAIN MENU  
FUNCTION  
NEWS REC MODE  
HUMID OPE  
REC START  
BATTERY/TAPE  
BATTERY SELECT  
PAUSE TIMER  
EXT DC IN SELECT  
BATT NEAR END ALARM  
BATT NEAR END CANCEL  
BATT END ALARM  
RETAKE MODE  
HD SDI OUT  
INTERVAL REC MODE  
INTERVAL REC TIME  
INTERVAL PAUSE TIME  
ECU REC CHK SW  
CHARACTER ON SDI  
BATT REMAIN FULL  
TAPE NEAR END ALARM  
TAPE NEAR END TIME  
TAPE END ALARM  
TAPE REMAIN/$  
BATTERY SETTING  
VTR VF INDICATOR  
AJ-BP490  
AU-BP402  
HP-30A  
TAPE (IND)  
BATTERY (IND)  
LEVEL METER (IND)  
AUDIO IN (IND)  
TC (IND)  
PRO14  
TRIM14  
TRIM13  
DIGITAL14  
DIGITAL13  
BP-H90  
VTR WARNING (IND)  
SAVE LED  
BP-H100  
NP-L40  
NP-L40 D  
BP-L60/90  
NP-1B  
FRONT MIC POWER  
MIC LOWCUT CH1  
MIC LOWCUT CH2  
LIMITER  
MIC/AUDIO  
TEST TONE  
REC CH3/CH4  
CUE SELECT  
FUNCTION  
NEWS REC MODE  
HUMID OPE  
REC START  
CUE REC  
EMBEDDED AUDIO (60 Hz)  
PAUSE TIMER  
TC MODE  
UB MODE  
RETAKE MODE  
TC/UB  
HD SDI OUT  
TCG SET HOLD  
FIRST REC TC  
P.OFF LCD DISPLAY  
TC OUT  
VITC UB MODE  
TC DISP SEL  
INTERVAL REC MODE  
INTERVAL REC TIME  
INTERVAL PAUSE TIME  
ECU REC CHK SW  
CHARACTER ON SDI  
BATTERY/TAPE  
BATTERY SELECT  
YEAR  
EXT DC IN SELECT  
BATT NEAR END ALARM  
BATT NEAR END CANCEL  
BATT END ALARM  
TIME/DATE  
MONTH  
DAY  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
$ TIME/DATE SET  
BATT REMAIN FULL  
TAPE NEAR END ALARM  
TAPE NEAR END TIME  
TAPE END ALARM  
VTR USER MENU SELECT  
VTR CARD READ/WRITE  
TAPE REMAIN/ $  
READ  
WRITE  
READ USER DATA  
VTR VF INDICATOR  
TAPE (IND)  
BATTERY (IND)  
LEVEL METER (IND)  
AUDIO IN (IND)  
TC (IND)  
READ FACTORY DATA  
WRITE VTR USER DATA  
VTR INITIALIZE  
DIAGNOSTIC  
VTR WARNING (IND)  
SAVE LED  
OPERATION  
DRUM RUNNING  
THREADING  
VTR SYSCON  
SERVO  
MECHACON  
FRONT  
MIC/AUDIO  
FRONT MIC POWER  
MIC LOWCUT CH1  
MIC LOWCUT CH2  
LIMITER  
TEST TONE  
REC CH3/CH4  
CUE SELECT  
CUE REC  
EMBEDDED AUDIO (60 Hz)  
TC/UB  
TC MODE  
UB MODE  
TCG SET HOLD  
FIRST REC TC  
P.OFF LCD DISPLAY  
TC OUT  
VITC UB MODE  
TC DISP SEL  
92 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MENUS  
The main menu consists of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU  
(1 to 4) of the camera and the VTR MAIN MENU of the  
VTR.  
These screens are index screens which are used to  
open the sub-menus.  
The setting menu is operated with the MENU button  
and JOG dial button.  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 screen  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
!LED  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the !LED screen.  
CAMERA SW  
MODE  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the CAMERA SW  
MODE screen.  
(Refer to pages 86 to 88 for the menu operations.)  
SUPER GAIN  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the SUPER GAIN  
screen.  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1 screen  
FRAME MODE  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the FRAME MODE  
screen.  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
ROP  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the ROP screen.  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3 screen  
MATRIX  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the MATRIX screen.  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
COLOR  
CORRECTION1  
Index for opening the COLOR  
CORRECTION 1 screen.  
CAM CARD  
READ/WRITE  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the CAM CARD  
READ/WRITE screen.  
COLOR  
CORRECTION2  
Index for opening the COLOR  
CORRECTION 2 screen.  
CAM CARD R/W USER  
Index for opening the CAM CARD  
R/W SELECT screen.  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
HIGH SETTING  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the LOW SETTING  
screen.  
SELECT  
ENG  
GENLOCK/IRIS  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the GENLOCK/IRIS  
screen.  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the MID SETTING  
screen.  
LENS ADJ  
ENG  
Index for opening the LENS ADJ  
screen.  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the HIGH SETTING  
screen.  
ADDITIONAL  
DTL1  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the ADDITIONAL  
DTL 1 screen.  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4 screen  
ADDITIONAL  
DTL2  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the ADDITIONAL  
DTL 2 screen.  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
SKIN TONE DTL USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the SKIN TONE  
DTL screen.  
CAM USER  
MENU SELECT1  
ENG  
Index for opening the FILM (CAM)  
USER MENU SELECT 1 screen.  
KNEE/LEVEL  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the KNEE/LEVEL  
screen.  
CAM USER  
MENU SELECT2  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the FILM (CAM)  
USER MENU SELECT 2 screen.  
GAMMA  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the GAMMA screen.  
CAM USER  
MENU SELECT3  
Index for opening the FILM (CAM)  
USER MENU SELECT 3 screen.  
CAMERA  
SETTING  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the CAMERA  
SETTING screen.  
BLACK  
SHADING  
Index for opening the BLACK  
SHADING screen.  
WHITE  
SHADING  
Index for opening the WHITE  
SHADING screen.  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 screen  
FLARE  
Index for opening the FLARE screen.  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
COLORIMETRY ENG  
Index for opening the COLORIMETRY  
screen.  
VF DISPLAY  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the VF DISPLAY  
screen.  
INITIALIZE  
DIAGNOSTIC  
EVALUATION  
OPTION  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the INITIALIZE  
screen.  
VF MARKER  
VF INDICATOR  
CAMERA ID  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the VF MARKER  
screen.  
Index for opening the DIAGNOSTIC  
screen.  
USER  
ENG  
Index for opening the VF INDICATOR  
screen.  
Index for opening the EVALUATION  
screen.  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the CAMERA ID  
screen.  
Index for opening the OPTION screen.  
SHUTTER  
SPEED  
Index for opening the SHUTTER  
SPEED screen.  
SHUTTER  
SELECT  
Index for opening the SHUTTER  
SELECT screen.  
93 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1  
ROP screen  
MATRIX screen  
The ROP (Remote Operation Panel) is set on this  
screen.  
The camera matrix is set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
MATRIX TABLE  
A
B
ENG  
For selecting the colour  
adjustment display.  
MASTER PED  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
–200  
:
0
:
USER  
ENG  
MASTER PEDESTAL  
level setting.  
MATRIX R-G  
MATRIX R-B  
MATRIX G-R  
MATRIX G-B  
MATRIX B-R  
MATRIX B-G  
–31  
:
+00  
:
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Colour adjustment  
Colour adjustment  
Colour adjustment  
Colour adjustment  
Colour adjustment  
Colour adjustment  
+18  
:
+31  
+200  
(Max.)  
–31  
:
+00  
:
MASTER DTL  
–31  
:
USER  
ENG  
H. DTL/V. DTL level  
setting.  
+00  
:
+31  
+31  
–31  
:
+00  
:
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
:
USER  
ENG  
MASTER GAMMA setting.  
(0.01 step)  
0.45  
:
0.75  
Three different values can  
be stored for LOW, MID  
and HIGH in the memory.  
+31  
–31  
:
+00  
:
R GAIN  
–200  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting R channel  
gain.  
+000  
:
+200  
(Max.)  
+31  
–31  
:
+00  
:
G GAIN  
–200  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting G channel  
gain.  
+31  
+000  
:
+200  
(Max.)  
–31  
:
+00  
:
+31  
B GAIN  
–200  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting B channel  
gain.  
+000  
:
+200  
(Max.)  
<Notes>  
OThe white balance and black balance will not change even if the  
MATRIX is changed.  
OTwo tables, A and B, can be stored in the memory for the  
MATRIX TABLE item.  
R PEDESTAL  
G PEDESTAL  
B PEDESTAL  
–100  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting R channel  
PEDESTAL level.  
O“00” applies for all the preset modes in MATRIX TABLE B.  
+000  
:
+100  
(Max.)  
–100  
:
+000  
:
+100  
(Max.)  
USER  
ENG  
For setting G channel  
PEDESTAL level.  
–100  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting B channel  
PEDESTAL level.  
+000  
:
+100  
(Max.)  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
94 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1  
COLOR CORRECTION 1 screen  
COLOR CORRECTION 2 screen  
The camera colour saturation adjustments and hue The camera colour saturation adjustments and hue  
adjustments are set on this screen.  
adjustments are set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
R (SAT)  
R (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
ENG  
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: red  
R-Mg (SAT)  
R-Mg (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
ENG  
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between red  
and magenta  
+63  
+63  
Mg (SAT)  
Mg (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: magenta  
Mg-B (SAT)  
Mg-B (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between  
magenta and blue  
+63  
+63  
B (SAT)  
B (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: blue  
B-Cy (SAT)  
B-Cy (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between blue  
and cyan  
+63  
+63  
Cy (SAT)  
Cy (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: cyan  
Cy-G (SAT)  
Cy-G (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between cyan  
and green  
+63  
+63  
G (SAT)  
G (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: green  
G-Yl (SAT)  
G-Yl (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between  
green and yellow  
+63  
+63  
Yl (SAT)  
Yl (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: yellow  
Yl-R (SAT)  
Yl-R (PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Colour saturation  
adjustment and hue  
adjustment: between  
yellow and red  
+63  
+63  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
95 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1  
LOW SETTING screen  
MID SETTING screen  
The low level gain is set on this screen.  
The middle level gain is set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
MASTER GAIN  
(FILM MENU)  
–3dB  
:
0dB  
:
USER  
ENG  
–3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9  
dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB  
or 30 dB can be set.  
MASTER GAIN  
(FILM MENU)  
–3dB  
:
3dB  
:
USER  
ENG  
–3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9  
dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB  
or 30 dB can be set.  
30dB  
30dB  
(CAM MENU)  
–6dB  
:
0dB  
:
–6dB, –3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6  
dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24  
dB or 30 dB can be set.  
(CAM MENU)  
–6dB  
:
6dB  
:
–6dB, –3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6  
dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24  
dB or 30 dB can be set.  
30dB  
30dB  
H. DTL LEVEL  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
0
:
8
:
12  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting H.DTL (detail)  
level.  
H. DTL LEVEL  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
0
:
8
:
12  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting H.DTL (detail)  
level.  
63  
63  
V. DTL LEVEL  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
0
:
12  
:
16  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting V.DTL (detail)  
level.  
V. DTL LEVEL  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
0
:
12  
:
16  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting V.DTL (detail)  
level.  
31  
31  
DTL CORING  
H. DTL FREQ  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
0
:
2
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting detail signal  
noise removal level.  
DTL CORING  
H. DTL FREQ  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
0
:
2
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting detail signal  
noise removal level.  
15  
15  
0
:
22  
:
31  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting H.DTL  
FREQUENCY.  
0
:
22  
:
31  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting H.DTL  
FREQUENCY.  
0
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting LEVEL  
DEPEND.  
0
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting LEVEL  
DEPEND.  
2
:
5
The detail of only the dark  
areas is removed when  
the Y detail is boosted.  
The higher the figure set  
for this item, the broader  
the range of the detail  
which is removed.  
2
:
5
The detail of only the dark  
areas is removed when  
the Y detail is boosted.  
The higher the figure set  
for this item, the broader  
the range of the detail  
which is removed.  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
:
USER  
ENG  
Master gamma setting.  
(0.01 step)  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
:
USER  
ENG  
Master gamma setting.  
(0.01 step)  
0.45  
:
0.45  
:
0.75  
0.75  
BLACK  
STRETCH  
+3, +2, +1,  
OFF,  
USER  
ENG  
For correcting the black  
level gradation.  
BLACK  
STRETCH  
+3, +2, +1,  
OFF,  
USER  
ENG  
For correcting the black  
level gradation.  
–1, –2, –3  
–1, –2, –3  
MATRIX TABLE  
A
B
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the colour  
correction matrix table.  
MATRIX TABLE  
A
B
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the colour  
correction matrix table.  
OFF  
OFF  
COLOR  
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the 12-axis  
independent colour  
COLOR  
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the 12-axis  
independent colour  
correction to ON or OFF.  
correction to ON or OFF.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
96 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1  
HIGH SETTING screen  
ADDITIONAL DTL 1 screen  
The special detail features of the camera are set on  
this screen.  
The high level gain is set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
MASTER GAIN  
(FILM MENU)  
–3dB  
:
6dB  
:
USER  
ENG  
–3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9  
dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB  
or 30 dB can be set.  
KNEE  
APERTURE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the knee  
aperture to ON or OFF.  
At the “ON” setting, the  
detail above the knee  
point is boosted.  
30dB  
(CAM MENU)  
–6dB  
:
12dB  
:
–6dB, –3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6  
dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24  
dB or 30 dB can be set.  
SLIM DTL  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the mode to  
make the detail finer to  
ON or OFF.  
30dB  
H. DTL LEVEL  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
0
:
8
:
12  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting H.DTL (detail)  
level.  
63  
ADDITIONAL DTL2 screen  
The special detail features of the camera are set on  
this screen.  
V. DTL LEVEL  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
0
:
12  
:
16  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting V.DTL (detail)  
level.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
31  
KNEE APE LVL  
0
:
5
USER  
ENG  
For changing the detail  
level in the high-  
brightness areas.  
DTL CORING  
H. DTL FREQ  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
0
:
5
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting detail signal  
noise removal level.  
DTL GAIN (+)  
DTL GAIN (–)  
DTL CLIP  
–31  
:
+00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For changing the H detail  
level in the “+” direction.  
15  
0
:
22  
:
31  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting H.DTL  
FREQUENCY.  
+31  
–31  
:
+00  
:
USER  
ENG  
For changing the H detail  
level in the “–” (bottom)  
direction.  
0
:
5
USER  
ENG  
For setting LEVEL  
DEPEND.  
+31  
The detail of only the dark  
areas is removed when  
the Y detail is boosted.  
The higher the figure set  
for this item, the broader  
the range of the detail  
which is removed.  
0
:
47  
:
63  
USER  
ENG  
For changing the clipping  
level of the detail signal.  
DTL SOURCE  
(G+B)/2  
(R+G)/2  
(2G+R+B)/4  
(3G+R)/4  
R
USER  
ENG  
For setting the ratio  
between the RGB signal  
components which  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
:
0.45  
:
USER  
ENG  
Master gamma setting.  
(0.01 step)  
generate the detail signal.  
0.75  
G
BLACK  
STRETCH  
+3, +2, +1,  
OFF,  
–1, –2, –3  
USER  
ENG  
For correcting the black  
level gradation.  
V DTL FREQ.  
360TV  
450TV  
540TV  
630TV  
720TV  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the V. DTL  
FREQUENCY.  
MATRIX TABLE  
A
B
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the colour  
correction matrix table.  
OFF  
COLOR  
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the 12-axis  
independent colour  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
correction to ON or OFF.  
97 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1  
SKIN TONE DTL screen  
KNEE/LEVEL screen  
The skin tone detail of the camera is set on this The knee settings of the camera are performed on this  
screen.  
screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
SKIN TONE DTL ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the skin tone  
detail to ON or OFF.  
MASTER PED  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
–200  
:
0
:
+018  
:
+200  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the master  
pedestal level (MASTER  
PED).  
SKIN TONE  
ZEBRA  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting zebra in the  
skin tone range to ON or  
OFF.  
At the “ON” setting, the  
amount of detail in the  
zebra viewing range is  
varied.  
MANUAL KNEE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the mode when  
the AUTO KNEE switch is  
at OFF.  
SKIN DTL  
CORING  
0
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting detail signal  
noise removal level.  
KNEE POINT  
(FILM MENU)  
30%  
:
65%  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the manual  
knee point position.  
<Note>  
This setting is cancelled  
when FILM REC has been  
selected as the CINE  
GAMMA SEL item setting  
on the GAMMA screen.  
5
:
7
90%  
Y MAX  
0
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the maximum  
luminance level at which  
the detail is boosted.  
:
(CAM MENU)  
80%  
:
95%  
:
107%  
190  
:
255  
Y MIN  
0
For setting the minimum  
luminance level at which  
the detail is boosted.  
:
10  
:
KNEE SLOPE  
(FILM MENU)  
150%  
:
500%  
:
600%  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the manual  
knee slope.  
<Note>  
This setting is cancelled  
when FILM REC has been  
selected as the CINE  
GAMMA SEL item setting  
on the GAMMA screen.  
255  
I CENTER  
I WIDTH  
Q WIDTH  
Q PHASE  
0
:
55  
:
255  
For setting the medium I-  
axis level at which the  
detail is boosted.  
(CAM MENU)  
0
:
50  
:
99  
0
:
90  
:
255  
For setting the minimum I-  
axis level at which the  
detail is boosted.  
WHITE CLIP  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting white clipping  
to ON or OFF.  
WHITE CLIP LVL 90%  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the white  
clipping level.  
:
0
:
10  
:
255  
For setting the maximum  
Q-axis level at which the  
detail is boosted.  
109%  
A. KNEE POINT  
(CAM MENU)  
(FILM MENU)  
80%  
:
95%  
:
100%  
:
107%  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the auto knee  
point position.  
–31  
For setting the minimum  
Q-axis level at which the  
detail is boosted.  
:
0
:
A. KNEE LVL  
100  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the maximum  
auto knee level.  
+31  
108  
109  
A. KNEE  
RESPONSE  
1
2
3
4
USER  
ENG  
For setting the AUTO  
KNEE response rate.  
<Note>  
The gamma characteristics are set using the KNEE POINT and  
KNEE SLOPE items when VIDEO REC was selected as the CINE  
GAMMA SEL item setting on the GAMMA screen.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
98 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 1  
GAMMA screen  
CAMERA SETTING screen  
The gamma settings of the camera are performed on The basic settings of the camera are set to ON or OFF  
this screen.  
on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
(FILM MENU)  
0.35  
:
0.45  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the master  
gamma when the unit is to  
be operated in the film  
mode.  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the detail (H,  
V) to ON or OFF.  
(Both the H detail and V  
detail are simultaneously  
set to either ON or OFF.)  
0.75  
R GAMMA  
B GAMMA  
–15  
:
+0  
:
USER  
ENG  
Amount by which the R  
channel gamma is  
corrected in respect of the  
master gamma level.  
HIGH COLOR  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the mode for  
expanding the dynamic  
range of the colours to ON  
or OFF.  
At the ON setting, the  
colours above the knee  
point are boosted.  
+15  
–15  
:
USER  
ENG  
Amount by which the B  
channel gamma is  
GAMMA  
TEST SAW  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the gamma  
correction to ON or OFF.  
+0  
:
+15  
corrected in respect of the  
master gamma level.  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the test signal  
to ON or OFF.  
CINE GAMMA  
SEL  
(FILM MENU)  
FILM REC  
VIDEO REC ENG  
USER  
For setting the gamma  
characteristics when the  
unit is to be operated in  
the film mode.  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the flare  
compensation to ON or  
OFF.  
FILM REC:  
H-F COMPE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the high-range  
frequency compensation  
mode to ON or OFF.  
The cine gamma  
characteristics for films  
are used.  
VIDEO REC:  
LIGHTING  
(FILM MENU)  
TUNGSTEN USER  
For switching the white  
balance preset value to  
the tungsten lighting type  
or daylight type.  
The cine gamma  
characteristics for video  
are used.  
DAY LIGHT  
ENG  
BLACK STR. LVL 0%  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the black  
strech level point position.  
<Notes>  
OThis setting is valid  
when FILM REC has  
been selected as the  
CINE GAMMA SEL item  
setting.  
D5600 K  
(CAM MENU)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the 5600 K  
presetting for the white  
balance to ON or OFF.  
<Note>  
The black balance must  
always be adjusted (see  
page 57) when this item’s  
setting has been changed.  
(FILM MENU)  
:
30%  
OThe KNEE POINT and  
KNEE SLOPE item  
settings on the  
KNEE/LEVEL screen  
are cancelled.  
DYNAMIC LVL  
(FILM MENU)  
200%  
300%  
400%  
500%  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the dynamic  
range.  
<Notes>  
OThis setting is valid  
when FILM REC has  
been selected as the  
CINE GAMMA SEL item  
setting.  
OThe KNEE POINT and  
KNEE SLOPE item  
settings on the  
KNEE/LEVEL screen  
are cancelled.  
<Note>  
The gamma characteristics are set using the BLACK STR. LVL and  
DYNAMIC LVL items when FILM REC has been selected as the  
CINE GAMMA SEL item setting.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
99 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
VF DISPLAY screen  
The information to be displayed inside the viewfinder  
is set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
DISP  
CONDITION  
NORMAL  
HOLD  
USER  
ENG  
NORMAL  
The statuses are  
displayed at all times.  
:
LOW LIGHT LVL  
(FILM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the light level  
for the LOW LIGHT  
display when the amount  
of light entering the  
OFF  
20%  
25%  
:
40%  
45%  
HOLD  
:
The statuses are  
displayed when MODE  
CHECK SW is ON.  
camera is too low.  
(CAM MENU)  
DISP MODE  
1
2
3
USER  
ENG  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN DISP.  
(CAM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the unit in  
which the synchro scan  
mode is to be displayed.  
Display  
Change  
1
2
3
sec  
%
deg  
FILTER  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
(FILM MENU)  
GAIN  
ECU MENU  
DISP.  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
menu screen is to be  
displayed when menu  
operations are performed  
using the AJ-EC3  
AWB  
AUTO KNEE SW  
SHUTTER  
ABB STATUS  
AWB STATUS  
Extension Control Unit.  
VF OUT  
VF DTL  
Y
NAM  
R
G
B
USER  
ENG  
For selecting VF OUT.  
NAM (N Additive Mix):  
The signal with the highest  
level among the R, G and  
B signals is output.  
0
:
4
5
USER  
ENG  
For selecting VF DTL.  
The detail of the signals  
for VF is further boosted.  
At the “0” setting, the  
detail is the same as the  
unit’s.  
Zebra pattern display  
ZEBRA1  
DETECT  
0%  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the ZEBRA1  
detection level (IRE level).  
ZEBRA 2  
OFF  
(CAM MENU)  
70%  
:
80%  
:
Video level  
ON  
SPOT  
109%  
(FILM MENU)  
109%  
ZEBRA2  
DETECT  
0%  
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the ZEBRA2  
detection level (IRE level).  
85%  
:
109%  
ZEBRA 2  
DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
ON  
OFF  
SPOT  
USER  
ENG  
For setting ZEBRA2 to ON  
or OFF and selecting  
SPOT. See “Zebra  
pattern display.”  
ZEBRA 1  
DETECT  
<Note>  
When used at the “SPOT”  
setting, ensure that the  
ZEBRA2 DETECT value is  
set higher than the  
0%  
ZEBRA1 DETECT value.  
If the ZEBRA2 DETECT  
value is lower than the  
ZEBRA1 DETECT value,  
the ZEBRA display will not  
appear.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
100 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
VF MARKER screen  
VF INDICATOR screen  
The information to be displayed inside the viewfinder The information to be displayed inside the viewfinder  
is set on this screen.  
is set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
SAFETY ZONE  
OFF  
1
:
3
:
12  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the safety  
zone display.  
EXTENDER  
SHUTTER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the extender  
display to ON or OFF.  
1
: 80% and 90% corner  
display  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the shutter  
speed display to ON or  
OFF.  
2
3
4
: 80% corner display  
: 90% corner display  
: 80% and 90% box  
display  
FILTER  
WHITE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the filter No.  
display to ON or OFF.  
5
6
7
: 80% box display  
: 90% box display  
: 80% and 90% corner  
display in 4:3 mode  
: 80% corner display in  
4:3 mode  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the AWB  
PRE/A/B display to ON or  
OFF.  
GAIN  
IRIS  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the currently  
selected gain display to  
ON or OFF.  
8
9
: 90% corner display in  
4:3 mode  
S
USER  
ENG  
S
: Only the super iris ON  
10 : 80% and 90% box  
display in 4:3 mode  
11 : 80% box display in  
4:3 mode  
12 : 90% box display in  
4:3 mode  
IRIS  
S+IRIS  
OFF  
status is displayed.  
IRIS: Only the aperture  
value is displayed.  
S+IRIS: Both the super iris  
ON status and the  
aperture value are  
displayed.  
OFF: Neither the super iris  
ON status nor the  
aperture value is  
displayed.  
CENTER MARK  
FRAME SIG  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the centre  
marker display to ON or  
OFF.  
4 : 3  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the frame  
marker display.  
(VISTA = 1 : 1.85)  
13 : 9  
14 : 9  
VISTA  
CAMERA ID  
ZOOM LVL  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the ID display  
during colour bar  
displaying.  
MARK  
LVL  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the frame  
marker display to ON or  
OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the zoom  
position value display to  
ON or OFF.  
0
:
15  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the picture  
levels on the outside of  
the frame marker.  
COLOR TEMP  
FRAME RATE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the colour  
temperature display to ON  
or OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the frame rate  
display to ON or OFF.  
VERSION ID  
(FILM MENU)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For displaying the gamma  
curve used when the  
internal colour bar signal  
recording mode is  
established.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
101 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
CAMERA ID screen  
SHUTTER SPEED screen  
The camera ID is set on this screen.  
On this screen, the shutter speed to be used is  
selected from among the POSITION items each of  
which contains a shutter speed which was set on the  
SHUTTER SELECT screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
ID 1:  
2222222222  
ENG  
For inputting the camera  
ID (max. 10 characters).  
<Note>  
Select whether this setting  
is to be mixed by selecting  
ON or OFF for CAMERA  
ID on the VF DISPLAY  
screen.  
==  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
ID 2:  
2222222222  
Item  
Remarks  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN 1  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For selecting SYNCHRO  
SCAN 1.  
ID 3:  
2222222222  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN 2  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For selecting SYNCHRO  
SCAN 2.  
1. Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the ID 1:,  
ID 2: or ID 3: item.  
POSITION 1  
POSITION 2  
POSITION 3  
POSITION 4  
POSITION 5  
POSITION 6  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting POSITION 1.  
For selecting POSITION 2.  
For selecting POSITION 3.  
For selecting POSITION 4.  
For selecting POSITION 5.  
For selecting POSITION 6.  
ON  
OFF  
2. When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor) moves  
to the ID input area, and the input mode is established.  
ON  
OFF  
3. Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the character to  
be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed is switched in  
the following sequence:  
Space: 3  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
7
letters: A—Z  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
ON  
OFF  
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
4. Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
5. Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the next  
position (right), and repeat steps 3 and 4 to input the characters  
(maximum of 10).  
6. When the characters have been input, turn the JOG dial button  
to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:” position.  
m
2222222222  
ID1:  
7. When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor) returns  
to the ID 1:, ID 2: or ID 3: item.  
2222222222  
ID1:  
ID2:  
ID3:  
n
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
102 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
SHUTTER SELECT screen  
A shutter speed is set in each POSITION item on this  
screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN 2  
90.0 deg  
:
180.0 deg  
:
225.0 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
SYNCHRO SCAN 2.  
POSITION 4 SEL 180.0 deg  
172.8 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 4.  
144.0 deg  
(FILM MENU)  
120.0 deg  
90.0 deg  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
POSITION 1 SEL  
(FILM MENU)  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 1.  
180.0 deg  
172.8 deg  
144.0 deg  
120.0 deg  
90.0 deg  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
(CAM MENU)  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
POSITION 5 SEL 180.0 deg  
172.8 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 5.  
(CAM MENU)  
1/120  
1/250  
144.0 deg  
120.0 deg  
1/500  
(FILM MENU)  
90.0 deg  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/2000  
POSITION 2 SEL 180.0 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 2.  
(FILM MENU)  
172.8 deg  
144.0 deg  
120.0 deg  
90.0 deg  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
(CAM MENU)  
POSITION 6 SEL 180.0 deg  
172.8 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 6.  
(CAM MENU)  
1/120  
144.0 deg  
1/250  
120.0 deg  
1/500  
90.0 deg  
1/1000  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/2000  
POSITION 3 SEL 180.0 deg  
172.8 deg  
ENG  
For selecting the shutter  
speed which is to be set in  
POSITION 3.  
(FILM MENU)  
144.0 deg  
120.0 deg  
90.0 deg  
45.0 deg  
1/100  
1/1000  
1/2000  
1/120  
(CAM MENU)  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
103 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
! LED screen  
CAMERA SW MODE screen  
The modes of the camera switches are set on this  
screen.  
The display of the  
viewfinder is set to ON or OFF on this screen.  
lamp which appears inside the  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
FILTER INH  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting whether or  
not the data in the AWB  
memories (channel A,  
channel B) is to be held  
for each filter.  
GAIN (0 dB)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the gain level is  
other than 0 dB.  
GAIN (–3 dB)  
SHUTTER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the gain level is  
other than –3 dB.  
ON:  
Only the channel A and  
channel B memories (2  
memories) regardless of  
the filter.  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the shutter is ON.  
OFF  
:
The data is held for each  
of the filters (4a2 = 8  
memories).  
WHITE PRESET ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when PRESET is selected  
as the AWB channel  
setting.  
SHOCKLESS  
AWB  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the  
SHOCKLESS AWB  
setting.  
“SHOCKLESS AWB”  
means that the switching  
of the WHITE BAL switch  
to A, B or PRST is not  
accompanied by a shock.  
FAST (high-speed:  
NORMAL  
SLOW  
FAST  
EXTENDER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the lens has been  
set to the EXTENDER  
mode.  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when a filter other than  
3200 K is used.  
approx. 0.5 sec.),  
NORMAL (normal speed:  
approx. 1 sec.) or SLOW  
(slow: approx. 3 sec.) can  
be set for this effect.  
BLACK STR  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when black stretch has  
been set to ON.  
COLOR BARS  
S. GAIN OFF  
SMPTE  
FULL BARS ENG  
USER  
For selecting the colour  
bar signals.  
SMPTE  
:
DAY LIGHT  
(FILM MENU)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the white balance  
preset value is the daylight  
type.  
SMPTE colour bars  
FULL BARS  
:
Full colour bars  
S.GAIN  
L/M/H  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the method  
for releasing the super  
gain mode.  
D5600 K  
(CAM MENU)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the preset white  
balance level is 5600 K.  
S.GAIN  
:
The mode is released by  
the super gain switch  
only.  
MATRIX  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when matrix has been set  
to ON.  
L/M/H  
:
The mode is released by  
changing the L/M/H  
switch setting.  
COLOR  
CORRECTION  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when colour correction  
has been set to ON.  
FRAME RATE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
lamp is to be turned on  
when the frame rate less  
than 11 fps is used.  
<Note>  
When ON has been selected for both GAIN (0 dB) and GAIN (–3  
dB), the  
dB.  
lamp will light at all gain levels except for –3 dB and 0  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
104 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
CAMERA SW MODE screen  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
USER1 SW  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For allocating the  
functions in USER1 SW.  
<Notes>  
S. BLK LVL  
OFF  
–10  
–20  
–30  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the super black  
level.  
INH  
S.GAIN  
S.IRIS  
S.BLK  
B.STR  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
Y GET  
OWhen B.STR has been  
selected as this item’s  
setting, the function for  
setting the black level  
gradation compensation  
to +3 is allocated.  
OWhen Y GET has been  
selected as this item’s  
setting, the function for  
measuring the output  
luminance level is  
ECU DATA  
SAVE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
ON : The data controlled  
by the AJ-EC3  
extension control  
unit is stored in the  
memory.  
OFF : The data is not  
stored in the  
RET SW  
memory.  
AUTO KNEE SW ON  
(FILM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
OFF  
AUTO KNEE function is to  
be made operational when  
the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE  
switch on the side panel  
has been set to the CAM  
AUTO KNEE ON position.  
allocated.  
The output luminance  
level of the area near  
the centre marker in the  
viewfinder is displayed  
in percentage units in  
the middle of the  
viewfinder screen for  
approximately 3  
seconds.  
(CAM MENU)  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
:
The AUTO KNEE  
function is made  
operational.  
OFF : The AUTO KNEE  
function is not made  
operational.  
USER2 SW  
(CAM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For allocating the  
functions in USER2 SW.  
<Notes>  
INH  
S.GAIN  
S.IRIS  
S.BLK  
B.STR  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
Y GET  
OWhen B.STR has been  
selected as this item’s  
setting, the function for  
setting the black level  
gradation compensation  
to +3 is allocated.  
OWhen Y GET has been  
selected as this item’s  
setting, the function for  
measuring the output  
luminance level is  
(FILM MENU)  
RET SW  
allocated.  
The output luminance  
level of the area near  
the centre marker in the  
viewfinder is displayed  
in percentage units in  
the middle of the  
viewfinder screen for  
approximately 3  
seconds.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
105 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2  
SUPER GAIN screen  
FRAME MODE screen  
The frame rate is set on this screen.  
The gain allocated to the SUPER GAIN switch is set  
on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
FRAME RATE  
RANGE  
60-12  
60-4  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the variable  
range of the frame rate.  
60-12:  
S. GAIN VALUE  
18dB  
24dB  
30dB  
36dB  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the gain  
when the SUPER GAIN  
switch is pressed.  
60 fps to 12 fps  
60-4:  
60 fps to 4 fps  
FRAME RATE  
(CAM MENU)  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the frame rate.  
<Note>  
60  
:
24  
:
When “60-12” has been  
selected as the FRAME  
RATE RANGE setting, the  
frame rate cannot be set to  
11 fps or below.  
(FILM MENU)  
4
SCAN REVERSE ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
This function is for  
correcting the images  
when the prime lens is  
used.  
ON  
:
The images are  
corrected (by  
reversing their top  
and bottom and their  
left and right).  
OFF : The images are not  
corrected.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
106 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3  
CAM CARD READ/WRITE screen  
CAM CARD R/W SELECT screen  
The settings for saving (writing) the menu data on the  
setup card, loading (reading) the data from the card,  
and configuring the card are performed on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
CAM MAIN  
MENU1 LEVEL  
R/W  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 1 (items  
other than those marked  
with }) data saving/loading  
when writing data onto the  
setup card or loading data  
from it to ON or OFF.  
ON : The data is  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
SELECT  
1
:
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the number  
of the file to be loaded.  
8
READ  
USER  
ENG  
For loading the data from  
the setup card.  
==  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The data is not  
recorded/loaded.  
SELECT  
1
:
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the number  
of the file to be saved.  
<Note>  
8
See page 89 for  
information on the items  
marked with }.  
WRITE  
USER  
ENG  
For saving the camera’s  
data on the setup card.  
==  
==  
==  
CAM MAIN  
MENU1 SW (})  
R/W  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 1 (items  
marked with }) data  
saving/loading when  
writing data onto the setup  
card or loading data from  
it to ON or OFF.  
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
USER  
ENG  
For formatting the setup  
card.  
USER  
ENG  
For reading the titles given  
to the data saved on the  
setup card.  
READ USER  
DATA  
USER  
ENG  
For loading the user area  
data of the camera’s  
memory.  
==  
==  
ON : The data is  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The data is not  
recorded/loaded.  
TITLE 1:  
to  
TITLE 8:  
USER  
ENG  
A title consisting of up to 8  
characters can be given to  
each file.  
CAM MAIN  
MENU2 R/W  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 2 data  
saving/loading when  
writing data onto the setup  
card or loading data from  
it to ON or OFF.  
CAM CARD R/W SELECT screen  
The settings for saving (recording) specific menu data  
on the setup card and loading (reading) the data from  
the card are performed on this screen.  
ON : The data is  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The data is not  
recorded/loaded.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
CAM MAIN  
MENU3 R/W  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 3 data  
saving/loading when  
writing data onto the setup  
card or loading data from  
it to ON or OFF.  
Item  
Remarks  
ID READ/WRITE ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting camera ID  
saving/loading when  
writing data onto the setup  
card or loading data from  
it to ON or OFF.  
ON : The camera ID is  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The camera ID is not  
recorded/loaded.  
ON : The data is  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The data is not  
recorded/loaded.  
CAM MAIN  
MENU4 R/W  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting FILM (CAM)  
MAIN MENU 4 data  
saving/loading when  
writing data onto the setup  
card or loading data from  
it to ON or OFF.  
Example:  
If the CAMERA ID  
contents are not to be  
changed when setup card  
data is saved/loaded,  
select OFF as the ID  
READ/WRITE setting.  
ON : The data is  
recorded/loaded.  
OFF : The data is not  
recorded/loaded.  
<Note>  
When the frame frequency setting has been changed, it is  
necessary to restart the unit by turning the POWER switch to OFF  
and then to ON again for the setting to be switched.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
107 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 3  
GENLOCK/IRIS screen  
LENS ADJ screen  
The genlock and iris control settings are performed on  
this screen.  
The lens adjustments are performed on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
F2.8 ADJ  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For outputting the voltage  
output only when ON is  
selected as this item’s  
setting.  
H PHASE  
COARSE  
0
:
USER  
ENG  
For coarsely adjusting the  
H phase during genlock.  
7
:
15  
F16 ADJ  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For outputting the voltage  
output only when ON is  
selected as this item’s  
setting.  
H PHASE FINE  
0
:
USER  
ENG  
For finely adjusting the H  
phase during genlock.  
32  
:
64  
<Note>  
When using a lens which enables the open limit and close limit of  
the lens aperture to be adjusted, set “F2.8ADJ” or “F16ADJ” to ON,  
and repeatedly adjust so that the lens aperture will be set to “F2.8”  
or “F16.”  
(This adjustment need not be performed if the lens does not have  
this adjustment function.)  
A. IRIS LEVEL  
0
:
50  
:
100  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the auto iris  
target level.  
The brightness (iris) is  
controlled using this value.  
The higher the value  
selected, the higher the  
brightness.  
A. IRIS  
PEAK/AVE  
0
:
50  
:
100  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the ratio  
between the auto iris peak  
and average value.  
The closer the setting is to  
0, the greater the  
tendency toward average  
control; conversely, the  
closer the setting is to  
100, the greater the  
tendency toward peak  
control.  
A. IRIS MODE  
NORM1  
NORM2  
CENTR  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the auto iris  
mode.  
NORM1  
:
The light is measured for  
the entire screen (except  
for the edges).  
NORM2  
:
The light is measured for  
the entire screen (except  
for the top part).  
CENTR  
:
The light is measured in  
the centre area of the  
screen only.  
S. IRIS LEVEL  
IRIS GAIN  
0
:
80  
:
100  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the super iris  
target level.  
(Backlight compensation  
mode)  
CAM  
LENS  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the iris  
gain is to be adjusted by  
the camera or lens.  
IRIS GAIN  
VALUE  
1
:
USER  
ENG  
For setting the iris gain  
adjustment value.  
6
:
10  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
108 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 1, 2 and 3 screens  
The settings for registering the items (the same as the ones on the FILM or CAM MAIN MENU 1, 2 and 3  
screens) allocated to the SUB menus to the SUB MENU screen are performed on this screen.  
¢
Registration ON ( ) or OFF () is set at the head of each item.  
Up to 42 camera unit items can be registered.  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 1 FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 2  
screen  
screen  
VF  
display  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
ROP  
ENG  
Index for opening the ROP screen.  
VF DISPLAY  
ENG  
Index for opening the VF DISPLAY  
screen.  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
HIGH SETTING  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the LOW SETTING  
screen.  
VF MARKER  
VF INDICATOR  
!LED  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the VF MARKER  
screen.  
Index for opening the MID SETTING  
screen.  
Index for opening the VF INDICATOR  
screen.  
Index for opening the HIGH SETTING  
screen.  
Index for opening the !LED screen.  
ADDITIONAL  
DTL1  
Index for opening the ADDITIONAL  
DTL1 screen.  
CAMERA SW  
MODE  
Index for opening the CAMERA SW  
MODE screen.  
ADDITIONAL  
DTL2  
Index for opening the ADDITIONAL  
DTL2 screen.  
SUPER GAIN  
Index for opening the SUPER GAIN  
screen.  
SKIN TONE DTL ENG  
Index for opening the SKIN TONE  
DTL screen.  
FRAME MODE  
Index for opening the FRAME MODE  
screen.  
KNEE/LEVEL  
GAMMA  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the KNEE/LEVEL  
screen.  
Index for opening the GAMMA screen.  
FILM (CAM) USER MENU SELECT 3  
screen  
CAMERA  
SETTING  
Index for opening the CAMERA  
SETTING screen.  
VF  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
display  
CAM CARD  
READ/WRITE  
ENG  
Index for opening the CAM CARD  
READ/WRITE screen.  
CAM CARD R/W ENG  
SELECT  
Index for opening the CAM CARD  
R/W SELECT screen.  
GENLOCK/IRIS  
ENG  
Index for opening the GENLOCK/IRIS  
screen.  
109 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4  
BLACK SHADING screen  
COLORIMETRY screen  
The black shading adjustments are performed on this The luminance signal standard is selected on this  
screen.  
screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
DETECTION  
ENG  
ENG  
For execution of the digital  
shading compensation.  
MATRIX  
SMPTE-274 ENG  
SMPTE-240  
NTSC  
For selecting the  
luminance signal  
standard.  
==  
CORRECT (DIG) ON  
OFF  
For setting the digital  
shading compensation to  
ON or OFF.  
WHITE SHADING screen  
INITIALIZE screen  
The white shading adjustments are performed on this  
screen.  
The film or camera menu settings are initialized and  
scene files are saved on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
SELECT  
1
:
8
ENG  
For designating the white  
shading file number.  
READ FACTORY  
DATA  
ENG  
For restoring the film or  
camera menu data  
settings to the factory  
settings.  
==  
==  
READ  
ENG  
ENG  
For reading the white  
shading file designated by  
the SELECT item.  
==  
==  
WRITE USER  
DATA  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For saving the user’s own  
film or camera menu data  
in the unit’s memory.  
DETECTION  
(V SAW)  
For executing vertical  
white shading  
SCENE SEL  
READ  
1
:
4
For designating the  
number of the scene file.  
compensation and  
recording the data in the  
white shading file  
designated by the  
SELECT item.  
For loading the scene file  
whose SCENE SEL was  
designated.  
==  
==  
==  
CORRECT  
TITLE  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the shading  
compensation to ON or  
OFF.  
WRITE  
For saving data in the  
scene file whose SCENE  
SEL was designated.  
A title consisting of up to  
12 characters can be  
given to each file.  
==  
RESET  
For restoring the scene file  
data settings to the factory  
settings.  
TITLE 1  
TITLE 2  
TITLE 3  
TITLE 4  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the title in  
scene file No.1.  
==  
==  
==  
==  
FLARE screen  
The camera’s flare settings are performed on this  
screen.  
For setting the title in  
scene file No.2.  
For setting the title in  
scene file No.3.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
For setting the title in  
scene file No.4.  
R FLARE  
0
ENG  
For setting the R channel  
flare; the preset value  
differs from one camera to  
another.  
:
<Note>  
100  
When the frame frequency setting has been changed, it is  
necessary to restart the unit by turning the POWER switch to OFF  
and then to ON again for the setting to be switched.  
G FLARE  
B FLARE  
0
:
100  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the G channel  
flare; the preset value  
differs from one camera to  
another.  
0
For setting the B channel  
flare; the preset value  
differs from one camera to  
another.  
:
100  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
110 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4  
DIAGNOSTIC screen  
OPTION screen  
The usage statuses and software versions are  
displayed on this screen.  
The engineer menu display is selected on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
ENG SECURITY ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For selecting whether to  
display the engineer  
menu.  
CAMSOFT (IN)  
ENG  
For displaying the version  
of the software for the  
built-in flash memory.  
==  
ON : The engineer menu  
is not displayed.  
OFF : The engineer menu  
is displayed.  
CAMSOFT (OUT)  
ENG  
For displaying the version  
of the software for the  
external flash memory.  
==  
SHD, ABB SW  
CTRL  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
For selecting whether to  
automatically correct black  
shading when the AUTO W/B  
BAL switch is pressed  
CAM TABLE  
PLD (CAM)  
ENG  
ENG  
For displaying the version  
of the gamma table.  
==  
==  
For displaying the version  
of the software for the  
continuously for 8 seconds or  
more on the ABB side.  
camera system computer.  
ON : Black shading is  
PLD (SHD)  
ENG  
For displaying the version  
of the software for the  
shading.  
==  
corrected automatically.  
OFF : Black shading is not  
corrected automatically.  
AWB AREA  
25%  
50%  
90%  
ENG  
ENG  
For selecting the white  
balance search area.  
EVALUATION screen  
The items which are measured for evaluation  
purposes are set on this screen.  
AWB & ABB  
OFFSET  
ON  
OFF  
For setting how gain and  
pedestal values, which are  
set on the ROP screen of  
FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU  
1, are to be processed  
after auto white balance  
and auto black balance  
are performed.  
(S/N, MODULATION, RESOLUTION, SENSITIVITY)  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
S/N  
ENG  
Index for opening the S/N  
measurement screen.  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Settings are added.  
The values are reset  
to zero.  
MODULATION  
RESOLUTION  
SENSITIVITY  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the modulation  
measurement screen.  
CAM MENU SEL VIDEO MENU ENG  
FILM MENU  
For setting the unit’s  
operation mode.  
VIDEO MENU:  
The unit is set to the  
video mode.  
Index for opening the resolution  
measurement screen.  
Index for opening the sensitivity  
measurement screen.  
FILM MENU:  
The unit is set to the film  
mode.  
SYSTEM FREQ. 59.94Hz  
60.00Hz  
ENG  
For setting the unit’s frame  
frequency.  
<Note>  
For details on how to release ENG SECURITY, consult your nearest  
service centre.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
111 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 4  
EVALUATION screen  
OS/N measurement screen  
OResolution measurement screen  
The resolution measurements are performed on  
this screen.  
The S/N measurements are performed on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
S/N  
ENG  
For setting the S/N  
measurement.  
RESOLUTION  
ENG  
For setting the resolution  
measurement.  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the DETAIL to  
ON or OFF.  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the DETAIL to  
ON or OFF.  
H-F COMPE.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the high-  
frequency compensation  
to ON or OFF.  
H-F COMPE.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the high-  
frequency compensation  
to ON or OFF.  
GAMMA  
MATRIX  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the GAMMA to  
ON or OFF.  
GAMMA  
MATRIX  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the GAMMA to  
ON or OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the MATRIX to  
ON or OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the MATRIX to  
ON or OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the FLARE to  
ON or OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the FLARE to  
ON or OFF.  
M. PED  
–200  
:
For adjusting the master  
pedestal level.  
M. PED  
–200  
:
For adjusting the master  
pedestal level.  
+140  
:
+200  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
0
:
+18  
:
+200  
OModulation measurement screen  
OSensitivity measurement screen  
The modulation measurements are performed on  
this screen.  
The sensitivity measurements are performed on  
this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
MODULATION  
ENG  
For setting the modulation  
measurement.  
SENSITIVITY  
ENG  
For setting the sensitivity  
measurement.  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the DETAIL to  
ON or OFF.  
KNEE  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the KNEE to  
ON or OFF.  
H-F COMPE.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the high-  
frequency compensation  
to ON or OFF.  
W. CLIP  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the white clip  
to ON or OFF.  
M. PED  
–200  
:
0
:
+18  
:
+200  
For adjusting the master  
pedestal level.  
GAMMA  
MATRIX  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the GAMMA to  
ON or OFF.  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the MATRIX to  
ON or OFF.  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the FLARE to  
ON or OFF.  
M. PED  
–200  
:
For adjusting the master  
pedestal level.  
(FILM MENU)  
(CAM MENU)  
0
:
+18  
:
+200  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
112 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens VTR MENUS  
VTR MAIN MENU screen  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
FUNCTION  
ENG  
Index for opening the FUNCTION  
screen.  
BATTERY/  
TAPE  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the BATTERY/TAPE  
screen.  
BATTERY  
SETTING  
Index for opening the BATTERY  
SETTING screen.  
VTR VF  
INDICATOR  
Index for opening the VTR VF  
INDICATOR screen.  
MIC/AUDIO  
TC/UB  
Index for opening the MIC/AUDIO  
screen.  
Index for opening the TC/UB screen.  
TIME/DATE  
Index for opening the TIME/DATE  
screen.  
VTR USER  
MENU SELECT  
Index for opening the VTR USER  
MENU SELECT screen.  
VTR CARD  
READ/WRITE  
Index for opening the VTR CARD  
READ/WRITE screen.  
VTR INITIALIZE ENG  
Index for opening the VTR INITIALIZE  
screen.  
DIAGNOSTIC  
ENG  
Index for opening the VTR  
DIAGNOSTIC screen.  
113 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU  
FUNCTION screen  
The VTR’s functions are set on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
NEWS REC  
MODE  
OFF  
0.2  
:
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the VTR  
START button  
acknowledgment time  
during recording.  
HD SDI OUT  
ON  
USER  
ENG  
For controlling the output  
signals of the HD SDI OUT  
connector.  
However, ON or OFF  
cannot be selected for  
these signals during  
recording: the status prior to  
the start of the recording is  
maintained.  
SIDE SW  
AUTO  
OFF  
2.0  
OFF  
:
The pressing of the VTR  
START button is  
acknowledged  
immediately, recording is  
stopped, and the unit is set  
to the REC PAUSE mode.  
ON:  
The signals are forcibly  
output. However, the  
signals are output in the  
EE/PB mode when the  
MONITOR OUT SDI  
switch on the side panel is  
set to OFF.  
0.2—2.0  
:
The pressing of the VTR  
START button is not  
acknowledged and  
recording is continued for  
the time set (in increments  
of 0.2 sec.).  
SIDE SW  
:
The signals are not output  
when the MONITOR OUT  
SDI switch on the side  
panel is set to OFF.  
HUMID OPE  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the VTR  
operation when  
condensation has formed.  
ON : Operation is  
continued as usual.  
OFF : Operation of all  
controls except the  
POWER switch and  
EJECT button is  
AUTO  
:
The signals are output  
when the connector has  
been connected to the  
output connector.  
However, the signals are  
output in the EE/PB mode  
when the MONITOR OUT  
SDI switch on the side  
panel is set to OFF.  
inhibited.  
REC START  
ALL  
NORMAL  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting  
acknowledgement of recording  
started by the VTR START  
button.  
OFF  
:
ALL:  
The output is stopped.  
The start of the recording is  
acknowledged regardless of  
the VTR mode.  
INTERVAL REC  
MODE  
ON  
USER  
For selecting the  
intermittent recording  
mode.  
ON: Intermittent recording  
is performed.  
ONE SHOT: Intermittent  
recording is performed  
once and then stopped.  
OFF: Intermittent recording  
is not performed.  
ONE SHOT ENG  
OFF  
NORMAL:  
The start of the recording is  
acknowledged only in the  
STOP (POWER SAVE) mode  
and REC PAUSE mode.  
PAUSE TIMER  
RETAKE MODE  
10  
20  
30  
60  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the amount of  
time REC PAUSE is to be held.  
10/20/30/60: 10, 20, 30 or 60  
minutes.  
<Note>  
Intermittent recording is set  
OFF when the unit’s power  
switch has been set to ON.  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
Functions for rewinding  
the tape to the position  
where recording started.  
ON : The RETAKE  
function works.  
OFF : The RETAKE  
function does not  
work.  
INTERVAL REC  
TIME  
00s10f  
:
59s29f  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the REC time for  
intermittent recording.  
<Note>  
When REC time is set at  
less than 1 second, the  
initial recording time will  
be 1 second.  
<Note>  
The RETAKE function is  
set OFF when the unit’s  
power switch has been set  
to ON.  
INTERVAL  
PAUSE TIME  
00h00m02s  
:
23h59m59s  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the REC  
PAUSE time for  
intermittent recording.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
114 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU  
FUNCTION screen  
BATTERY/TAPE screen  
The warning tone which signals the remaining battery  
charge and remaining tape and which is heard during  
shooting can be switched off if they prove to be  
distracting.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
ECU REC CHK  
SW  
R. REVIEW USER  
RETAKE  
For selecting the unit  
operation when the REC  
CHK button on the AJ-  
EC3 extension control unit  
is pressed.  
ENG  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
R. REVIEW:  
Rec review is performed.  
RETAKE:  
Retake is performed,  
then playback.  
BATTERY  
SELECT  
AJ-BP490  
AU-BP402  
HP-30A  
PRO14  
TRIM14  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the type of  
battery used.  
AJ-BP490 : AJ-BP490  
battery  
AU-BP402 : AU-BP402  
battery  
TRIM13  
CHARACTER  
ON SDI  
MENU  
STATUS  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the item to  
be superimposed on the  
SDI output signals.  
MENU:  
The menu screen is  
superimposed.  
DIGITAL14  
DIGITAL13  
BP-H90  
BP-H100  
NP-L40  
NP-L40 D  
BP-L60/90  
NP-1B  
HP-30A  
PRO14  
TRIM14  
TRIM13  
: PACO HP-30A  
battery  
: Anton/Bauer  
PRO14 battery  
: Anton/Bauer  
TRIM14 battery  
: Anton/Bauer  
TRIM13 battery  
STATUS:  
The menu screen and  
viewfinder status display  
are superimposed.  
<Note>  
Neither of these items will  
be superimposed when  
the CHARACTER switch  
on the side panel is set to  
OFF.  
DIGITAL14 : Anton/Bauer  
DIGITAL  
battery (14V)  
DIGITAL13 : Anton/Bauer  
DIGITAL  
battery (13V)  
BP-H90  
: IDX BP-H90  
battery  
BP-H100 : IDX BP-H100  
battery  
NP-L40  
: IDX NP-L40  
battery  
NP-L40D : IDX NP-L40D  
battery  
BP-L60/90 : Sony BP-  
L60/90 battery  
NP-1B  
: Sony NP-1B  
battery  
EXT DC IN  
SELECT  
AC-ADPT  
AJ-BP490  
AU-BP402  
HP-30A  
PRO14  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the power  
source to be connected to  
the DC IN socket.  
TRIM14  
TRIM13  
BP-H90  
BP-H100  
NP-L40  
BP-L60/90  
NP-1B  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
115 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU  
BATTERY/TAPE screen  
BATTERY SETTING screen  
The type of battery to be used is selected and its  
settings are performed on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
BATT NEAR  
END ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the warning  
tone heard when the  
battery is near the end of  
its charge to ON or OFF.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
AJ-BP490  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
ENG  
For setting the AJ-BP490  
and the PACO HP-90A  
battery.  
BATT NEAR  
END CANCEL  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For switching the function  
which cancels the warning  
tone heard when the  
battery is near the end of  
its charge to ON or OFF  
using the MODE switch.  
AU-BP402  
HP-30A  
PRO14  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the AU-BP402  
battery.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the PACO HP-  
30A battery.  
BATT END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the warning  
tone heard when the  
battery is at the end of its  
charge to ON or OFF.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the  
Anton/Bauer PRO14  
battery.  
TRIM14  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the  
Anton/Bauer TRIM14  
battery.  
BATT REMAIN  
FULL  
100%  
70%  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the battery  
capacity at which “FULL”  
is to appear on the LCD  
display window as the  
remaining battery display  
(for all 7 segments to be  
lit).  
TRIM13  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the  
Anton/Bauer TRIM13  
battery.  
DIGITAL14  
DIGITAL13  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the  
Anton/Bauer digital battery  
(14V).  
TAPE NEAR  
END ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the warning  
tone heard when the end  
of the tape is near to ON  
or OFF.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the  
Anton/Bauer digital battery  
(13V).  
TAPE NEAR  
END TIME  
3min  
2min  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the remaining  
tape time for which the  
warning tone is to be  
heard when the end of the  
tape is near.  
BP-H90  
BP-H100  
NP-L40  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the IDX BP-  
H90 battery.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the IDX BP-  
H100 battery.  
TAPE END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the warning  
tone heard when the tape  
has reached its end to ON  
or OFF.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the IDX NP-  
L40 battery.  
NP-L40 D  
BP-L60/90  
NP-1B  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the IDX NP-  
L40D battery.  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the time for  
one segment of the  
remaining tape display  
indicated on the LCD  
display window.  
3min/$ : One segment is  
set to 3 minutes.  
5min/$ : One segment is  
set to 5 minutes.  
TAPE REMAIN/$ 3min/  
$
$
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the Sony BP-  
L60/90 battery.  
5min/  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
For setting the Sony NP-  
1B battery.  
1. Either “¢” or “” appears in front of each item to indicate whether  
the item is set to ON or OFF.  
¢ : ON  
: OFF  
2. Each time the JOG dial button is pressed, the setting moves in  
the following sequence:  
ON/OFF setting  
7
AUTO/MANUAL setting  
AUTO  
: The NEAR END voltage value preset in each battery  
is used.  
MANUAL : The NEAR END voltage setting for each battery can  
be changed.  
7
NEAR END voltage setting  
7
Item movement  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
116 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU  
VTR VF INDICATOR screen  
The information to be displayed in the viewfinder is set  
on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
TAPE (IND)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For switching the  
remaining tape display to  
ON or OFF.  
SAVE LED  
SAVE&TAPE  
SAVE  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the operation  
of the SAVE lamp.  
SAVE  
:
This lights when the VTR  
SAVE/STBY switch has  
been set to SAVE.  
It goes off during  
BATTERY (IND)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For switching the battery  
voltage display to ON or  
OFF.  
LEVEL METER  
(IND)  
CH1  
CH1•CH2  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting what the  
audio level meter is to  
display.  
CH1: The level of the CH1  
signals only is displayed.  
CH1•CH2: The levels of  
both the CH1 and CH2  
signals are displayed.  
OFF: No display.  
recording.  
SAVE&TAPE  
:
This lights when the VTR  
SAVE/STBY switch has  
been set to SAVE.  
It goes off during  
recording.  
When the tape is  
approaching its end, it  
flashes in tandem with  
the warning alarm that  
sounds when tape-end is  
approaching.  
AUDIO IN (IND)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For switching the audio  
input display to ON or OFF.  
ON: The audio input is  
displayed.  
OFF: The audio input is not  
displayed.  
TC (IND)  
TCG  
TCR  
TCG/TCR  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting what the  
time code is to display.  
TCG: The time code  
generated by the time  
code generator is  
MIC/AUDIO screen  
The MIC/AUDIO settings are performed on this  
screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
displayed in the E-E  
mode.  
Item  
Remarks  
TCR: The time code reader  
value is displayed in the  
V-V mode.  
TCG/TCR: The time code  
generated by the time  
code generator is  
FRONT MIC  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
ON : The phantom power  
is supplied to the  
front microphone.  
OFF : The phantom power  
is not supplied to the  
front microphone.  
displayed in the E-E  
mode; the time code  
reader value is displayed  
in the V-V mode.  
OFF: The time code is not  
displayed.  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH1  
FRONT  
REAR  
F&R  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the high-pass  
filter for the CH1 mic input.  
FRONT: The high-pass filter  
for the front mic  
input is set to ON.  
REAR : The high-pass filter  
for the rear mic  
input is set to ON.  
F&R : The high-pass  
filters for both the  
front and rear mic  
inputs are set to  
OFF  
VTR WARNING  
(IND)  
ALWAYS  
NORMAL  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting when the  
VTR’s warnings are to be  
displayed.  
ALWAYS: The warning  
display always appears  
when a warning has  
occurred.  
ON.  
NORMAL: The display  
appears for 3 seconds  
after the warning  
OFF : The high-pass filter  
for the CH1 input  
is set to OFF.  
occurred and for 3  
seconds after recording  
was started or  
completed.  
OFF: The warning displays  
do not appear.  
<Note>  
The frequency characteristics in the MIC LOWCUT ON mode are  
200 Hz to 10 kHz.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
117 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU  
MIC/AUDIO screen  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH2  
FRONT  
REAR  
F&R  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the high-pass  
filter for the CH2 mic input.  
FRONT: The high-pass filter  
for the front mic  
REC CH3/CH4  
CH1/2  
CH3/4  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the audio  
signals to be recorded on  
the CH3 track and CH4  
track.  
OFF  
input is set to ON.  
REAR : The high-pass filter  
for the rear mic  
input is set to ON.  
F&R : The high-pass  
filters for both the  
front and rear mic  
inputs are set to  
CH1/2:  
The CH1 signal is  
recorded on the CH3  
track, and the CH2  
signal is recorded on the  
CH4 track.  
CH3/4  
:
The CH3 and CH4  
signals which are  
supplied from the  
camera adapter are  
recorded.  
ON.  
OFF : The high-pass filter  
for the CH2 input  
is set to OFF.  
LIMITER  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For switching the audio  
limiter to ON or OFF.  
ON : The limiter operates.  
OFF : The limiter does not  
operate.  
CUE SELECT  
SIDE SW  
CH1  
CH2  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the audio  
signals to be recorded on  
the cue track.  
MIX  
SIDE SW:  
The signals selected by  
the CUE switch on the  
side panel are recorded.  
TEST TONE  
NORMAL  
ALWAYS  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
NORMAL:  
The test tone signal is  
output when the AUDIO  
IN switch for CH1 is set  
to front while BAR is  
selected as the  
CH1  
:
The CH1 signals are  
recorded.  
CHSEL  
CH2  
:
The CH2 signals are  
recorded.  
CAM/BAR switch setting.  
ALWAYS  
:
MIX  
:
The test tone signal is  
always output when BAR  
is selected as the  
The CH1 and CH2  
mixed signals are  
recorded.  
CAM/BAR switch setting.  
OFF  
:
CUE REC  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether  
signals are to be recorded  
on the cue track.  
The test tone signal is  
not output.  
CHSEL  
:
ON : The signals will be  
recorded on the cue  
track.  
OFF : The signals will not  
be recorded on the  
cue track.  
The test tone signal is  
output for the selected  
channel when the  
AUDIO IN switch CH1 or  
CH2 is set to front while  
BAR is selected as the  
CAM/BAR switch setting.  
The power-saving  
mode is established.  
EMBEDDED  
AUDIO (60 Hz)  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
embedded audio signals  
are to be output to the HD  
SDI OUT connector when  
60.00 Hz has been  
<Note>  
The frequency characteristics in the MIC LOWCUT ON mode are  
200 Hz to 10 kHz.  
selected as the frame  
frequency setting.  
ON  
:
The embedded  
audio signals are  
output.  
OFF : The embedded  
audio signals are not  
output.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
118 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU  
TC/UB screen  
The time code and user’s bit settings are performed on  
this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
TC MODE  
DF  
NDF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the time code  
to the DF or NDF mode.  
DF : The time code is set  
to the drop frame  
TCG SET HOLD ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the operation  
of TCG when the TCG  
SET 5 power OFF 5  
power ON 5 REC  
operations are performed.  
ON : The TCG setting is  
stored when the  
mode.  
NDF: The time code is set  
to the non-drop  
frame mode.  
<Note>  
power is turned off,  
and is not  
This unit will perform the  
processing in the non-drop  
frame mode when the  
frame rate has been set to  
24 fps.  
regenerated.  
OFF : The TCG setting is  
not stored when the  
power is turned off,  
but is regenerated.  
FIRST REC TC  
REGEN  
PRESET  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the TC REGEN  
mode when recording is  
started.  
UB MODE  
USER  
DATE  
TIME  
EXT  
USER  
ENG  
For setting what is to be  
written as the user’s bit in  
the LTC area.  
USER : User setting (fixed).  
DATE : Real time value for  
year/month/day/  
hours.  
REGEN  
:
The time code set on the  
tape is regenerated.  
However, when the  
frame rate has been set  
to 24 fps, the time code  
on the tape in those  
parts where the drop  
frame mode was  
TCG  
TIME : Real time value for  
hours/minutes/  
seconds.  
EXT : The UBG value is  
slave-locked when  
a TC signal is  
established will not be  
regenerated.  
supplied from an  
external source.  
(The user setting is  
used when no  
external input is  
supplied.)  
PRESET  
:
The time code set on the  
tape is not regenerated.  
However, it is forcibly  
regenerated when the  
unit is transferred from  
the rec-pause mode to  
the recording mode.  
TCG  
:
Time code  
generator value  
<Note>  
Set the time on the  
TIME/DATE menu screen  
when using the UB MODE  
item with real-time  
operation.  
<Note>  
When USER is set for the UB MODE item, it is not possible to set  
EXT for the VITC UB MODE item.  
Similarly, it is not possible to set EXT for the UB MODE item when  
USER has been set for the VITC UB MODE item.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
This unit automatically stores as the tape management information both the frame rate information which indicates the shooting speed and  
the active frame information which indicates the first frame where the frame image was switched in the user’s bit of the sub-code track area  
(this used to be the LTC area). This information is output from the TC OUT connector and HD SDI OUT connector. Further, the active  
frame information is stored in the least significant digit of the user’s bit while the frame rate information is stored in its lower third and fourth  
digits.  
<Notes>  
OWhen “DATE,” “TCG” or “USER” has been selected as the UB MODE item setting on the TC/UB screen, the tape management  
information is output from the least significant digit to the lower fourth digit of the user’s bit, so no other user’s bit information will be  
output.  
OThe tape management information is not output as the user’s bit information in the VIDEO AUX area (this used to be the VITC area).  
119 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU  
TC/UB screen  
The time code and user’s bit settings are performed on  
this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
P. OFF LCD  
DISPLAY  
ON  
OFF  
USER  
ENG  
For setting whether the  
LCD display is to appear  
when the power is OFF.  
ON : The LCD display  
appears even when  
the power is OFF.  
OFF : The LCD display  
does not appear  
VITC UB MODE  
USER  
DATE  
TIME  
EXT  
USER  
ENG  
For setting what is to be  
written as the user’s bit in  
the VITC area.  
USER : User setting (fixed).  
DATE : Real time value for  
year/month/day/  
TCG  
hours.  
TIME : Real time value for  
hours/minutes/  
when the power is  
OFF.  
seconds.  
The power-saving mode is  
established.  
EXT : The UBG value is  
slave-locked when  
a TC signal is  
TC OUT  
TCG  
TCG/TCR  
USER  
ENG  
For selecting the time  
code which is to be output  
to the time code output  
connector.  
supplied from an  
external source.  
(The user setting is  
used when no  
external input is  
supplied.)  
TCG  
:
The time code generated  
by the time code  
generator is output at all  
times.  
TCG : Time code  
generator value  
<Notes>  
TCG/TCR  
:
O Set the time on the  
TIME/DATE menu  
screen when using the  
UB MODE item with  
real-time operation.  
OThe tape management  
information is not  
output as the user’s bit  
information in the  
VITC area.  
The time code generated  
by the time code  
generator is output in the  
E-E mode; the time code  
reader value is output in  
the V-V mode.  
TC DISP SEL  
24F  
25F  
30F  
USER  
ENG  
For setting the number of  
frames to be displayed per  
second in the time code  
frame digits.  
24F: 0 to 23 frames will be  
displayed per second.  
25F: 0 to 24 frames will be  
displayed per second.  
30F: 0 to 29 frames will be  
displayed per second.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
120 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens VTR MAIN MENU  
TIME DATE screen  
VTR INITIALIZE screen  
The time/date settings are performed on this screen.  
The VTR MENU settings are initialized and the user  
data is saved on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
YEAR  
00—02—99 ENG  
For setting the year.  
READ FACTORY  
DATA  
ENG  
For returning the menu  
data to the factory  
settings.  
==  
MONTH  
DAY  
1 —12  
1 —31  
0 —23  
0 —59  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the month.  
For setting the day.  
WRITE VTR  
USER DATA  
ENG  
For saving the VTR MENU  
data inherent to the user  
into the unit’s memory.  
==  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
For setting the hours.  
For setting the minutes.  
For entering the time and  
date.  
==  
$ TIME/DATE  
SET  
VTR USER MENU SELECT screen  
DIAGNOSTIC screen  
This is the index screen for opening the screens  
containing the items to be registered on the VTR unit’s  
USER MENU.  
The use statuses and software versions are displayed  
on this screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
VF  
display  
SUB menu  
Remarks  
OPERATION  
ENG  
Operating time with power  
ON.  
==  
==  
==  
==  
FUNCTION  
ENG  
Index for opening the FUNCTION  
screen.  
DRUM RUNNING  
THREADING  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Number of hours the drum  
has rotated.  
BATTERY/TAPE ENG  
Index for opening the BATTERY/TAPE  
screen.  
Number of times tapes  
have been loaded.  
VTR VF  
INDICATOR  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
Index for opening the VTR VF  
INDICATOR screen.  
VTR SYSCON  
For displaying the version  
of the system  
MIC/AUDIO  
Index for opening the MIC/AUDIO  
screen.  
microcomputer.  
SERVO  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For displaying the version  
of the servo  
microcomputer.  
==  
==  
==  
TC/UB  
Index for opening the TC/UB screen.  
MECHACON  
FRONT  
For displaying the version  
of the mechanism control  
microcomputer.  
VTR CARD READ/WRITE screen  
The settings for saving the menu data onto the setup  
card and loading the data from it are performed on this  
screen.  
For displaying the version  
of the LCD panel drive  
microcomputer.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
READ  
ENG  
For loading the VTR data  
from the setup card.  
==  
==  
==  
WRITE  
ENG  
ENG  
For saving the VTR data  
onto the setup card.  
READ USER  
DATA  
For loading the VTR user  
area data contained in the  
unit’s internal memory.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
121 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens VTR USER MENU SELECT  
¢
ON ( ) or OFF () is set on this screen to determine which items are to be registered on the USER MENU  
screen.  
The maximum number of VTR unit items which can be registered is 14.  
FUNCTION screen  
BATTERY/TAPE screen  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
NEWS REC  
MODE  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the NEWS REC MODE  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
BATTERY  
SELECT  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the BATTERY SELECT  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
HUMID OPE  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the HUMID OPE item  
on the USER MENU  
screen.  
EXT DC IN  
SELECT  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the EXT DC IN  
SELECT item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
REC START  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the REC START item  
on the USER MENU  
screen.  
BATT NEAR  
END ALARM  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the BATT NEAR END  
ALARM item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
PAUSE TIMER  
RETAKE MODE  
HD SDI OUT  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the PAUSE TIMER item  
on the USER MENU  
screen.  
BATT NEAR  
END CANCEL  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the BATT NEAR END  
CANCEL item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the RETAKE MODE  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
BATT END  
ALARM  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the BATT END ALARM  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the HD SDI OUT item  
on the USER MENU  
screen.  
BATT REMAIN  
FULL  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the BATT REMAIN  
FULL item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
INTERVAL REC  
MODE  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the INTERVAL REC  
MODE item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
TAPE NEAR  
END ALARM  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TAPE NEAR END  
ALARM item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
INTERVAL REC  
TIME  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the INTERVAL REC  
TIME item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
TAPE NEAR  
END TIME  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TAPE NEAR END  
TIME item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
INTERVAL  
PAUSE TIME  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the INTERVAL PAUSE  
TIME item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
TAPE END  
ALARM  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TAPE END ALARM  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
ECU REC CHK  
SW  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the ECU REC CHK SW  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TAPE REMAIN/$  
item on the USER MENU  
screen.  
TAPE REMAIN /$  
CHARACTER  
ON SDI  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the CHARACTER ON  
SDI item on the USER  
MENU screen.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset mode.  
122 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu screens VTR USER MENU SELECT  
¢
ON ( ) or OFF () is set on this screen to determine which items are to be registered on the USER MENU  
screen.  
The maximum number of VTR unit items which can be registered is 14.  
VTR VF INDICATOR screen  
MIC/AUDIO screen  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
TAPE (IND)  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the TAPE (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
REC CH3/CH4  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the REC CH3/CH4 item  
on the USER MENU screen.  
CUE SELECT  
CUE REC  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the CUE SELECT item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
BATTERY (IND)  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the BATTERY (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the CUE REC item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
LEVEL METER  
(IND)  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the LVEL METER (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
EMBEDDED  
AUDIO (60Hz)  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the EMBEDDED  
AUDIO (60Hz) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
AUDIO IN (IND)  
TC (IND)  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the AUDIO IN (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
TC/UB screen  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TC (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
TC MODE  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the TC MODE item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
VTR WARNING  
(IND)  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the VTR WARNING (VF  
INDICATOR) item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
UB MODE  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the UB MODE item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
SAVE LED  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the SAVE LED item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
TCG SET HOLD  
FIRST REC TC  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TCG SET HOLD item  
on the USER MENU screen.  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the FIRST REC TC item  
on the USER MENU screen.  
MIC/AUDIO screen  
Variable  
range  
VF  
display  
Item  
Remarks  
P.OFF LCD  
DISPLAY  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the P.OFF LCD  
DISPLAY item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
FRONT MIC  
POWER  
¢
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the FRONT MIC  
POWER item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
TC OUT  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration  
of the TC OUT item on the  
USER MENU screen.  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH1  
¢
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
ENG  
For setting the registration of  
the MIC LOWCUT CH1 item  
on the USER MENU screen.  
VITC UB MODE  
TC DISP SEL  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the VITC UB MODE item  
on the USER MENU screen.  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH2  
¢
For setting the registration of  
the MIC LOWCUT CH2 item  
on the USER MENU screen.  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TC DISP SEL item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
LIMITER  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the LIMITER item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
TEST TONE  
¢
For setting the registration  
of the TEST TONE item on  
the USER MENU screen.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in  
the preset mode.  
123 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning system  
When a problem is detected immediately after the  
power is turned on or during operation, the user is  
alerted to the trouble by the display window (LCD),  
WARNING lamp and the lamps inside the viewfinder  
and also by warning tones heard from the speaker or  
earphone.  
$ SLACK  
$ RF  
LCD display  
LCD display  
The RF display flashes (during recording).  
OThe SLACK display flashes.  
OAn error code is displayed where the  
time code is normally displayed.  
WARNING lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second  
(during recording).  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second.  
The lamp flashes four times a second.  
The alarm sounds continuously.  
The SLACK display flashes.  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second  
(during recording).  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
The alarm sounds four times a second  
(during recording).  
The RF display comes on (during  
recording).  
What the warning  
indicates  
The warning points to a problem in the  
tape take-up.  
What the warning  
indicates  
The video heads are clogged.  
The warning points to a problem in the  
recording system.  
VTR unit’s operation The VTR unit stops.  
When a solenoid problem has been  
detected, the power is turned off.  
VTR unit’s operation Head clogging is detected, and the alarm  
tone is sounded.  
(The LCD warning display continues.)  
Remedial action  
Check the error code (see page 126) in  
the display window, and consult your  
nearest service centre.  
The cleaning roller is activated and the  
heads are cleaned (for at least 10  
seconds).  
Recording continues but the signals may  
not be recorded properly.  
The warning display is held until the rec-  
pause mode is established. It goes off as  
soon as the unit is transferred from the  
rec-pause mode.  
Remedial action  
Clean the heads.  
If the signals cannot be recorded properly  
after cleaning, turn off the power, and  
consult your nearest service centre.  
$ REC WARNING  
$ SERVO  
LCD display  
“00:00:00:11” appears where the time  
code is normally displayed (for at least 5  
seconds during recording).  
LCD display  
The SERVO display lights (during  
recording and playback).  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second  
(during recording and playback).  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second (for  
at least 3 seconds during recording).  
The lamp flashes four times a second  
(during recording and playback).  
The lamp flashes four times a second (for  
at least 3 seconds during recording).  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
The alarm sounds four times a second  
(during recording and playback).  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
The alarm sounds four times a second  
(for at least 3 seconds during recording).  
The SERVO display lights (during  
recording and playback).  
The REC WARNING display flashes (for  
at least 3 seconds during recording).  
What the warning  
indicates  
The servo operation is disturbed.  
What the warning  
indicates  
The warning points to a problem in the  
recording control signal.  
VTR unit’s operation Operation continues but the unit may not  
VTR unit’s operation Recording continues but the signals may  
not be recorded properly while the  
operate properly.  
Remedial action  
Turn off the power, and consult your  
nearest service centre. When tape travel  
starts, the warning display may flash for a  
moment and go off: this is normal and not  
indicative of a malfunction.  
warning is displayed.  
Remedial action  
The warning points to a problem with the  
control signal inside the unit.  
Consult your nearest service centre.  
124 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning system  
$ HUMID  
LCD display  
$ TAPE END  
LCD display  
The HUMID display lights.  
All the segments flash.  
The display will flash for 80 minutes after  
the condensation detection is released.  
TAPE  
E
F
WARNING lamp  
OThe lamp lights when condensation has  
been detected.  
OThe lamp will flash once a second after  
condensation detection is released.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp lights (during stop and in the  
standby OFF mode).  
The lamp flashes 4 times a second  
(during stop and in the standby OFF  
mode).  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes four times a second.  
Warning alarm  
ODuring recording, the alarm sounds four  
times a second.  
OAt all other times, the alarm sounds  
continuously.  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
The alarm sounds continuously (during  
stop and in the standby OFF mode).  
OThe SAVE lamp flashes four times a  
second during stop and in the standby  
OFF mode (when SAVE&TAPE has  
been selected as the setting for the  
SAVE LED item on the VTR VF  
Viewfinder  
The HUMID display lights.  
Condensation has formed.  
What the warning  
indicates  
INDICATOR screen of VTR MENU).  
VTR unit’s operation The VTR unit’s operation differs depending  
on the setting selected for HUMID OPE on  
the setting menu.  
=
O“ ” lights (during stop and in the  
standby OFF mode).  
OWhen the ON setting has been selected,  
the VTR unit continues to operate.  
OWhen the OFF setting has been  
selected, the VTR unit continues with  
the recording, but this operation will stop  
if the tape sticks.  
What the warning  
indicates  
The tape has come to its end.  
VTR unit’s operation If recording, playback or fast forwarding is  
in progress, the operation is stopped.  
Remedial action  
Rewind the tape.  
For 80 minutes after condensation  
detection is released, the drum will  
rotate however no other operation is  
possible.  
Alternatively, replace the cassette tape.  
$ BATTERY NEAR END  
Remedial action  
Stop the tape travel, and turn off the  
power.  
If the HUMID display fails to go off even  
when the power is turned off and back on,  
wait until it goes off.  
LCD display  
E
F
BATT  
This segment flashes.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes once a second.  
The lamp flashes once a second.  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
The alarm sounds four times a second.  
The BATT display flashes once a second.  
The battery is near the end of its charge.  
$ TAPE NEAR END  
LCD display  
This segment flashes.  
What the warning  
indicates  
TAPE  
E
F
VTR unit’s operation The VTR unit continues to operate.  
Remedial action Replace the battery if necessary.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp flashes once a second (during  
recording).  
The lamp flashes once a second (during  
recording).  
$ BATTERY END  
LCD display  
Warning alarm  
The alarm sounds once a second (during  
recording).  
E
F
This can be switched on the setting menu.  
BATT  
Viewfinder  
All the segments flash.  
OThe remaining tape display flashes  
once a second (in the E-E mode).  
OThe SAVE lamp flashes in tandem with  
the warning alarm (when SAVE&TAPE  
has been selected as the setting for the  
SAVE LED item on the VTR VF  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
The lamp lights.  
The lamp flashes once a second.  
The alarm sounds continuously.  
The BATT display lights.  
Warning alarm  
Viewfinder  
INDICATOR screen of VTR MENU).  
=
O“ ” flashes once a second (three  
What the warning  
indicates  
The battery is at the end of its charge.  
seconds during recording).  
What the warning  
indicates  
The tape is approaching its end.  
VTR unit’s operation All operation is stopped and the tape is  
unloaded.  
Only cassette eject operation is possible.  
VTR unit’s operation The VTR unit continues to operate.  
Remedial action Replace the cassette tape if necessary.  
Remedial action  
Replace the battery.  
125 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency eject  
If the cassette cannot be ejected by pressing the  
EJECT button, use a screwdriver or similar tool to  
press and turn the EMERGENCY screw. This  
enables the cassette to be removed.  
While pushing in with the screwdriver, turn the  
EMERGENCY screw counterclockwise until the  
tape is ejected.  
OThis screw needs to be rotated through about 20  
turns after the first turn until the unloading can  
be started.  
3
Set the power to OFF.  
1
OThis screw needs to be rotated through about 90  
turns after the first turn until the tape is ejected.  
Remove the rubber cap where shown in the figure.  
Insert a Phillips head screwdriver into the cross-  
shaped part of the EMERGENCY screw (red).  
2
Remove the cassette.  
4
5
Set the power to OFF.  
Return the rubber cap to its original position.  
1
Cassette  
4
holder  
<Notes>  
ODo not turn the EMERGENCY screw except in an  
emergency.  
ODo not turn the screw clockwise. Stop turning the  
screw as soon as the tape is ejected. Otherwise,  
the mechanism may be damaged.  
OAfter the tape is ejected, the cassette holder will not  
lock into place even when an attempt is made to  
close it. Be sure to turn the power off and turn it  
back on to reset the mechanism’s operation, and  
then close the cassette holder.  
OA clicking sound will be heard when the  
EMERGENCY screw is turned: this sound is made  
by the reel drive operation and is therefore not  
indicative of a malfunction.  
2,5  
EMERGENCY  
screw  
Push in and turn at the same time.  
3
OThis screw needs to be rotated through about 20 turns after the first turn until the unloading can be started.  
OThis screw needs to be rotated through about 90 turns after the first turn until the tape is ejected.  
Error codes  
One of the following error codes appears in the  
display window when an error has occurred in the unit  
for some reason.  
Code No.  
Description of error  
Pinch solenoid problem  
04  
08  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
38  
3F  
6F  
11  
Cleaning solenoid problem  
Supply reel problem  
Take-up reel problem  
Capstan problem  
Cylinder problem  
Loading problem  
Servo transmission problem  
Camera transmission problem  
Reference signal problem  
Video initialization problem  
126 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Condensation  
Head cleaning  
The water vapor in the air may form as tiny droplets  
on the head drum when the unit is moved from a cold  
location to a warm location or used in a very humid  
place. This phenomenon is known as condensation,  
and running the tape under these conditions is liable  
to cause the tape to stick to the drum.  
Use the AJ-CL12LP cleaning cassette if the heads  
need to be cleaned.  
Take care to read the  
instructions accompanying the cleaning tape since the  
video heads may be damaged if the tape is not used  
in the correct way.  
Note the following points:  
ORemove the tape when the unit’s operation is to be  
started in conditions where condensation may form.  
OBefore loading the tape, set the power switch to  
ON, and check that the HUMID display is not lit in  
the display window.  
Cleaning inside the viewfinder  
ODo not use thinners or any other solvent to remove  
dirt.  
OUse a lens cleaner available on the market to wipe  
the lens.  
ONEVER wipe the mirror.  
<Note>  
For safety reasons, the HUMID display will flash and  
the drum will rotate for 80 minutes after condensation  
detection is released.  
During this time, the operation buttons cannot be  
operated.  
If dirt or dust has found its way onto the mirror,  
remove it using an air blower available on the  
market.  
Check that the HUMID display  
is not lit.  
Phenomena inherent to CCD  
cameras  
Smear  
This phenomenon may occur when very bright  
subjects are shot.  
The faster the electronic shutter speed, the more likely  
that it will occur.  
Replacing the backup battery  
The backup battery is already installed when the unit  
is shipped.  
When it has discharged, the “BACK UP BATT  
EMPTY” display appears for 3 seconds on the  
viewfinder screen when the POWER switch is set to  
ON.  
Moreover, the time code value of the TCG will be set  
to “00:00:00:00” and the backup of the time code  
value will no longer be possible: this means that the  
backup battery should be replaced.  
Consult with your nearest service centre, and replace  
the spent battery with a new battery (CR2032 or  
BR2032).  
Backup battery  
127 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inspections prior to shooting  
Preparation for inspection  
Inspecting the camera unit  
Perform the following inspections prior to shooting to  
check that the systems are operating properly.  
It is recommended that the images be checked using  
a colour monitor.  
Set the camera unit’s switches as shown in the figure  
below.  
VTR SAVE/STBY: STBY  
OUTPUT/AUTO  
KNEE: BARS  
Insert a fully charged battery.  
1
Set the POWER switch to ON, and check that the  
2
HUMID display has not come on and that at least 5  
segments of the BATTERY display are lit.  
OIf the HUMID display has come on, wait until it  
goes off.  
OIf fewer than 5 segments of the BATTERY  
display have lit, replace the battery with one  
having an adequate charge.  
After checking that there are no cables near the  
cassette holder or top panel, press the EJECT  
button to open the cassette holder.  
3
WHITE BAL:  
A or B  
GAIN: Normally set to 0 dB; change  
Aperture: Automatic  
Zoom: Automatic  
After checking the following points, load the  
to a more suitable value if  
the picture is too dark.  
4
cassette tape and close the cassette holder.  
OThe cassette tape must not be set to the  
accidental erasure prevention mode.  
OThere must be no tape slack.  
3
4
2
2
1
128 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inspections prior to shooting  
Inspecting the viewfinder  
Adjust the position of the viewfinder.  
Set both the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to  
FRONT, and set LEVEL METER on the VTR VF  
INDICATOR screen of VTR MENU to CH1.  
Check when sound is input from the microphone  
connected to the MIC IN jack on the lens that the  
audio level is displayed on the viewfinder screen.  
Check when LEVEL METER on the VTR VF  
INDICATOR screen of VTR MENU is set to OFF  
that the audio level display is cleared from the  
viewfinder screen.  
1
8
9
Check that the colour bar signals are displayed on  
2
the viewfinder screen, and adjust the BRIGHT,  
CONTRAST and PEAKING controls in such a way  
that the colour bar signals appear clearly on the  
viewfinder.  
Check that the MENU screen is shown on the  
3
viewfinder screen and that the item settings can be  
changed by operating the MENU button or JOG  
dial button.  
Check when the ZEBRA switch is set to ON that  
the zebra pattern appears on the viewfinder  
screen, and check when it is set to OFF that it is  
cleared from the screen.  
(Refer to pages 86 to 88 for the menu operations.)  
Set the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch to CAM, and  
select the settings for the CC and ND FILTER  
controls.  
Check that the figures for the FILTER displays on  
the viewfinder screen change to reflect the  
changes in the control positions.  
4
<Note>  
Depending on the setting statuses, the items and  
functions in steps 3 to 6 may not be displayed or they  
may not operate.  
In a case like this, switch the unit to the engineer  
mode, set DISPLAY MODE on the menu’s VF  
DISPLAY screen to “3,” and set the necessary items  
on the SHUTTER SPEED, !LED and FILM (CAM)  
USER MENU SELECT 1, 2 and 3 screens.  
5Take the following steps, and check that the  
lamp lights when the items set to ON on the !LED  
screen of FILM (CAM) MAIN MENU 2 have been  
operated.  
1. Use the GAIN switch to set the gain to any value  
except 0 dB.  
2. Set the SHUTTER switch to ON.  
3. Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.  
4. Engage the lens extender.  
5. Set the FILTER controls to any setting except B.  
Repeatedly press the SHUTTER switch from ON to  
SEL, and check that the shutter setting changes on  
the viewfinder screen.  
6
Point the lens at any object, and turn the focus ring  
7
to bring the object into focus.  
Check that an image of the object appears on the  
viewfinder.  
129 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inspections prior to shooting  
Inspecting the aperture and  
zoom functions  
Inspecting the VTR unit  
Perform all the steps outlined in section “1. Tape  
travel inspection” through section “4. Earphone and  
speaker inspection” one after the other.  
Set the zoom to the motorized zoom mode, and  
1
check its operations in this mode.  
Check that the image changes when the zoom is  
set to the telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
1. Tape travel inspection  
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE, and  
check that the VTR SAVE lamp inside the  
viewfinder lights.  
1
Set the zoom to the manual zoom mode, and  
check its operations in this mode.  
Turn the manual zoom lever, and check that the  
image changes when the zoom is set to the  
telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
2
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY, and  
check that the VTR SAVE lamp goes off.  
2
Set the aperture to the auto adjustment mode,  
3
Set the TCG switch to R-RUN.  
point the lens at some objects with different  
brightness levels, and check that the auto aperture  
adjustment works.  
3
Set the DISPLAY switch to CTL.  
4
Set the aperture to the manual adjustment mode,  
turn the aperture ring, and check that the manual  
aperture is adjusted.  
4
Press the unit’s VTR START button, and check  
that:  
OThe tape reels rotate.  
5
OThe figure shown on the counter display  
changes.  
OThe REC lamp inside the viewfinder lights.  
OThe RF and SERVO displays do not appear in  
the display window.  
While holding down the auto instantaneous  
5
aperture adjustment button, point the lens at some  
objects with different brightness levels, and check  
that the auto instantaneous aperture adjustment  
function works.  
Press the unit’s VTR START button again. Check  
that the tape stops and the REC lamp inside the  
viewfinder goes off.  
6
Return the aperture to the auto adjustment mode,  
switch the GAIN switch setting to L, M and H, and  
check that:  
6
OThe aperture is adjusted for objects of the same  
brightness level in tandem with the switching of  
the gain setting.  
OThe gain displayed on the viewfinder screen is  
switched in tandem with the switching of the  
gain setting.  
Use the lens VTR button to check the same  
operations as in steps 5 and 6.  
7
Press the RESET button, and check that  
“00:00:00:00” appears on the counter display.  
8
When a lens with an extender has been installed,  
set the extender to the operating position, and  
check that it works properly.  
7
Set the LIGHT switch to ON, and check that the  
display window illuminates.  
9
Press the REW button, and after the tape has  
been rewound for a few seconds, press the  
PLAY/PAUSE button.  
10  
Check that the tape is recorded, played back  
and rewound properly.  
Press the FF button, and check that the tape is  
fast forwarded properly.  
11  
130 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inspections prior to shooting  
5. Inspection using external microphones  
Inspecting the VTR unit  
2. Automatic audio level adjustment  
function inspection  
Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN  
CH1 and CH2 jacks.  
1
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to  
REAR.  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switch to  
AUTO.  
2
1
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the  
back panel to MIC or +48V in accordance with the  
external mic’s power supply type.  
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to  
FRONT.  
3
2
MIC : Internal power supply mic.  
+48V : External power supply mic.  
Point the microphone connected to the MIC IN jack  
3
at a suitable sound source, and check that the  
changes in the level displays for both CH1 and  
CH2 reflect the changes in the strength of the  
sound.  
Point the microphones at the sound source, and  
4
check that the changes in the audio levels  
displayed on the audio level meter of the display  
window and in the viewfinder reflect the changes in  
the strength of the sound.  
This inspection can also be performed for each  
channel by connecting one of the microphones to  
each channel in turn.  
3. Manual audio level adjustment function  
inspection  
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to  
FRONT.  
1
6. Inspections relating to the time code  
and user’s bit  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switch to  
MAN.  
2
Set the user’s bit as required.  
For details on the setting procedure, refer to  
“Setting the user’s bit” (page 65).  
1
Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls.  
Check that when they are turned clockwise, the  
level displays increase.  
3
Set the time code.  
For details on the setting procedure, refer to  
“Setting the time code” (page 66).  
2
4. Earphone and speaker inspection  
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY.  
1
2
Set the TCG switch to R-RUN.  
3
4
Turn the MONITOR control, and check that the  
speaker volume changes.  
Press the VTR START button.  
Check that the figure on the counter display  
changes as the tape travels.  
Connect the earphones to the PHONES jack.  
3
Check that the sound from the speaker is muted,  
and that the microphone’s sound is heard in the  
earphones.  
Press the VTR START button again.  
Check that the tape stops and the figure shown on  
the counter display stops changing.  
5
Turn the MONITOR control, and check that the  
earphone volume changes.  
4
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN.  
Check that the figure on the counter display  
changes irrespective of the tape travel.  
6
Set the DISPLAY switch to UB.  
7
Check that the user’s bit which has been set is  
displayed in the six higher digits in the internal  
colour bar signal recording mode.  
131 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
[GENERAL]  
[CAMERA UNIT]  
Pickup device:  
Supply voltage:  
2/3-inch, IT-type CCD with on-chip lens (1 million  
pixels)  
System:  
DC 12 V (DC 11 V—DC 17 V)  
Power consumption:  
39 W (maximum)  
RGB 3-CCD system  
33 W (during SAVE REC mode)  
Total number of pixels:  
1370 (H) a 744 (V)  
indicates safety information.  
Number of effective pixels:  
1280 (H) a 720 (V)  
Ambient operating temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
Storage temperature:  
Quantizing:  
10-bit non-linear  
Digital signal processing:  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
74.25 MHz (60.00 Hz)  
Horizontal drive frequency:  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
74.25 MHz (60.00 Hz)  
Sensitivity:  
F12 (2000 lux, 89.9% reflection, frame rate: 23.98  
fps, synchro scan: 50%)  
Minimum subject brightness:  
0.7 lux (with F/1.4, +36 dB, frame rate: 59.94 fps)  
Video S/N ratio:  
–20°C to +60°C  
Ambient operating humidity:  
Less than 85% (relative humidity)  
Continuous operating time:  
Approx. 62 minutes  
(when using the 14/40W Anton/Bauer Trim pack)  
Weight:  
4.5 kg (main unit only)  
Approx. 7.2 kg  
(including main unit, viewfinder, lens, battery pack,  
tape and microphone)  
Dimensions (WaHaD) (excluding grip):  
54 dB (typ.)  
132a204a330 mm  
Horizontal resolution:  
More than 700 TV lines (centre)  
Sampling frequency:  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
74.25 MHz (60.00 Hz)  
Shutter speed:  
Preset:  
1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.  
Synchro scan:  
0.8% to 97.2%  
(aperture angle: 3 to 350 degrees)  
Frame rate:  
59.94 fps to 3.996 fps (0.99 fps/step)  
60 fps to 4 fps (1.0 fps/step)  
Programmable gain:  
Choice of 3 positions (L/M/H) from  
–6/–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30 dB  
Super gain:  
18/24/30/36 dB selectable  
Built-in filters:  
CC filter:  
A: CROSS, B: 3200 K, C: 4300 K, D: 6300 K  
ND filter:  
1: CLEAR, 2: 1/4 ND, 3: 1/16 ND, 4: 1/64 ND  
Lens mount:  
2/3-inch, Bayonet type  
Optical system:  
F/1.4 prism system  
Registration:  
Less than 0.03% (entire range) (excluding lens  
distortion)  
132 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
[VTR UNIT]  
[Connector Section]  
VTR Tape Transport System  
Input  
Tape used:  
MIC IN (XLR, 3-pin female):  
–40 dBu (switchable to –50 dBu using internal  
switch)  
1/4-inch DVCPRO L-size cassette tape  
Tape speed:  
135.28 mm/sec. (59.94 Hz)  
135.4154 mm/sec.(60.00 Hz)  
Recording/playback time:  
46 minutes (using AJ-HP46LP)  
32 minutes (using AJ-HP32LP)  
FF/REW time:  
Phantom +48 V supported  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (XLRa2, 3-pin female):  
LINE/MIC/MIC+48V switching type  
LINE  
MIC  
: 0 dBu  
: –60 dBu  
MIC+48V: Phantom +48V, –60 dBu  
Approx. 3 minutes (using AJ-HP46LP)  
GENLOCK IN (BNC):  
1.0 V [p-p] (tri-level sync pulse: 300 mV), 75  
Compliant with SMPTE296M (analogue sync)  
standard  
VTR Video System  
Sampling frequency:  
TC IN (BNC):  
Y
: 74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
0.5 V—8 V [p-p], high impedance  
74.25 MHz (60.00 Hz)  
PB/PR : 37.0879 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
37.125 MHz (60.00 Hz)  
Quantizing:  
Output  
AUDIO OUT (XLR, 5-pin male):  
0 dBu  
8 bits  
Video compression system:  
DCT + variable-length code  
Video compression ratio:  
1/6.7  
PHONES:  
Stereo mini jack  
HD SDI OUT (BNCa2):  
0.8 V [p-p], with switch function  
TC OUT (BNC):  
Error correction:  
Reed-Solomon product code  
Video recording bit rate:  
100 Mbps  
2.0 V [p-p], low impedance  
Other  
Video band:  
LENS (12-pin)  
Y
: 20 MHz  
ECU (6-pin)  
PB/PR : 10 MHz  
DC IN (XLR, 4-pin male):  
DC 12 V (DC 11 V—17 V)  
DC OUT (4-pin):  
VTR Audio System  
(during playback on standard player)  
DC 12 V (DC 11 V—17 V), 0.4 A (max.)  
EVF (20-pin)  
Sampling frequency:  
48.0 kHz (59.94 Hz)  
48.048 kHz (60.00 Hz)  
synchronized with video  
Quantizing:  
16 bits  
Frequency response:  
20 Hz to 20 kHz 1.0 dB (at reference level)  
Dynamic range:  
More than 85 dB (at 1 kHz, AWTD)  
Distortion:  
Less than 0.1% (at 1 kHz, reference level)  
Wow and flutter:  
Below measurable limits  
Head room:  
18 dB  
133 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
[VIEWFINDER]  
[RELATED COMPONENTS & PARTS]  
Relating to power supply  
Battery pack:  
AU-BP402  
Battery charger:  
(Optional accessory: AJ-HVF27P)  
CRT:  
2.0-inch high-resolution monochrome tube  
Video system:  
720P/59.94 Hz  
720P/60.00 Hz  
External adjustment controls:  
Controls:  
AG-B425 (for charging AU-BP402 battery pack)  
Battery case:  
AU-M402H  
AC adapter:  
AJ-B75  
BRIGHT, CONTRAST, PEAKING  
Switches:  
TALLY HIGH/OFF/LOW, ZEBRA ON/OFF  
Viewfinder  
2.0-inch viewfinder:  
AJ-HVF27P  
[ACCESSORIES]  
Shoulder strap (a1)  
Relating to external VTRs  
Extension control unit:  
AJ-EC3  
Audio components  
Microphone kit:  
AJ-MC700P  
Mic holder:  
AJ-MH700P  
Wireless mic receiver:  
WX-RJ700  
Camera attachment:  
WX-ZJ770  
Maintenance products  
Cleaning tape:  
AJ-CL12LP  
Soft carrying case:  
AJ-SC900  
Rain cover:  
SHAN-RC700  
Weight and dimensions indicated are approximate.  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
134 (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Panasonic Broadcast Europe  
Panasonic Broadcast Europe Ltd  
West Forest Gate, Wellington Road, Wokingham, Berkshire RG40 2AQ U.K. Tel: 0118 902 9200  
Panasonic Broadcast Europe GmbH  
Hagenauer Str. 43, 65203 Wiesbaden-Biebrich Deutschland Tel: 49-611-1816-0  
Printed in Japan  
VQT9707  
F0402W @  
E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miller Electric Welder CP 302 User Manual
MTD Lawn Mower Lawn Tracto User Manual
Multi Tech Systems Modem MT9234ZPX UPCI NV User Manual
NAD CD Player C542 User Manual
NETGEAR Telephone Accessories FA411 User Manual
Niles Audio Satellite Radio TM XM User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill 307040 User Manual
NuTone Door C905 User Manual
Omnimount Indoor Furnishings 1100161 User Manual
Panasonic Conference Phone KX TS401W User Manual